JP6820486B2 - Bullet game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a ball game machine having a game area in which a game ball is launched.

Conventionally, among various types of ball game machines, the so-called first-class pachinko game machine has a plurality of symbols changed in a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided in the substantially center of the game board. Display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display", etc.). This game machine shifts to a special game called a big hit, in which more prize balls can be obtained than in a normal game when the combination of symbols when the movement of symbols in a plurality of rows is stopped becomes a specific mode. Known as a thing. In the variable display of symbols in the display area, not only a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed, but also the variable display time is usually set in a state where one more symbol is aligned and a big hit is obtained, as in the so-called reach screen. The production is designed to raise the expectations of the player, such as making it longer than that. In addition, the player's expectation is raised by the effect of using characters in images such as patterns to give a story to the variable display and the advance notice effect that suggests the high degree of expectation for transition to special games. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

In recent years, the need for model development that is not tied to any type has been recognized in order to further improve game playability. For example, pachinko game machines that mix multiple game machines of the same type or mix different types of game machines. Development is also underway. In addition, when it becomes a small hit, it is promoted from "small hit" to "big hit" by hitting right and passing the game ball through a specific area (V zone) in the variable ball entry device, and a new special A gaming machine that generates a game (hereinafter, also referred to as "small hit development big hit" or "small hit V") has also been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-230714 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-29308

Small hit development In order to increase the number of balls to be ejected in a game machine equipped with a big hit, it is necessary for the game ball to pass through a specific area at the time of a small hit, which makes the game playability different from that of a general game machine. The present inventor considered that it is necessary to control or direct a game different from the conventional one in order to enhance the interest of the game in the game machine equipped with the small hit development big hit.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to realize suitable game control or production in a game machine equipped with a small hit development big hit.

In order to solve the above problems, the ball game machine of a certain aspect of the present invention has a game board in which a game area is formed, a first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and a predetermined position in the game area. The second starting port and the first starting port, which are provided in the above and have a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state. A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired as a trigger or the second lottery value acquired as a trigger for entering the second starting port, and for showing the result of the winning / failing determination. A symbol display device that displays the variation of the symbol, a hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination, and the game area. A symbol that is provided at a predetermined position and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and a large winning opening that triggers the entry of the game ball to give a profit to the player, and a symbol indicating that the result of the win / fail judgment is a small hit Is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening, and the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing judgment is a big hit are stopped and displayed, or the small hit is displayed. When a game ball that has entered the large winning opening during a game passes through a specific area provided inside the game, it is in a state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, and there are multiple unit games that involve opening the large winning opening. It includes a special game control means for executing the special game including the effect, an effect display device for displaying the effect, and an effect determining means for determining the effect displayed on the effect display device. The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses, and the predetermined number is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game. The number of balls entered into the large winning opening, which is the type of profit that the player can obtain for the special game executed when the game ball entered in the large winning opening passes through a specific area during the small hit game. And, at least one of the types of profits that the player can obtain in the normal game after the end of the special game differs depending on the type of the symbol indicating the small hit, and the directing determination means is a big prize during the small hit game. When a game ball that has entered the mouth passes through a specific area, a small hit is made between the end of the final opening of the large winning opening in the small hit game and the first opening of the large winning opening in the special game. An effect suggesting the type of profit that the player can obtain is displayed according to the type of the symbol to be shown.

It should be noted that any combination of the above components, or those in which the components and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. , Is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize suitable game control or production in a game machine equipped with a small hit development big hit.

It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the back side of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the functional block of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main board. It is a figure which shows typically the hit / fail judgment table. It is a figure which shows typically the symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table schematically. It is a figure which shows typically the advance hit / fail judgment table referred to in the advance hit / miss judgment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a sub-board. It is a figure which shows the outline of the mobile cooperation system typically. It is a block diagram which shows schematic the hardware composition of the main board and the sub board. It is a block diagram which shows schematic the hardware composition of the effect display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing of the main board in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of S120 in FIG. 13 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of an interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing of the sub-board in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of S518 in FIG. 16 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the command is received from the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when a sub CPU receives a command from a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the timer interrupt for various device control occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the special symbol variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the decorative pattern variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special game. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a small hit game. It is a figure which shows the main game flow of the pachinko game machine of 1st Example. It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of 1st Example. It is a figure which shows the breakdown of the big hit in the pachinko game machine of 1st Example. It is a figure which shows a plurality of kinds of fluctuation pattern modes. It is a perspective view of the start port unit. It is a right side view of a start port unit. It is sectional drawing of the start port unit. It is a figure which shows the example of the chance production in a normal time. It is a figure which shows the example of the chance production in the time saving game. It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Example. It is an external perspective view which shows the structure of the big prize opening schematicly. It is a figure which shows schematic the internal structure of the grand prize opening. It is a figure which shows the example of the production during a small hit game. It is a figure which shows the display timing of a suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the production. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect following FIG. 40.

(Prerequisite technology)
In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, a plurality of games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed. The second game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game as the plurality of games are not executed at the same time. Further, in order to achieve both of these playability, a plurality of start winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, and a plurality of hold lamps are provided. It is designed so that the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the number of big hits in the first game. For example, the second game has a higher probability of becoming a big hit with a probability change, and the second game has a larger number of unit games constituting a special game when a big hit occurs (opening time of the big winning opening). A long open unit game and a short open unit game with a short open time are mixed in one special game, and even if the number of unit games is the same, the second game is a longer open unit game than the first game. The second game is designed to have a relatively higher profit than the first game, such as (including the case where the number of games is large). On top of that, at first, aim for the first hit in the first game, and after the big hit in the first game gives a shorter time, aim for the second game repeatedly and get a lot of balls. Realize.

FIG. 1 shows a basic structure on the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 100 is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. The gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball plate 105, a lower ball plate 106, a launch handle 107, a speaker 108, an effect button 109, a cross key 110, Includes decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 has an opening portion and is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 100 at a position where it should be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting a game ball, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate 105 has a mechanism for storing the game ball, sending the game ball to the launch rail, extracting the game ball to the lower ball plate 106, and the like. The lower ball plate 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the door 104, and sound effects and music sounds according to the game state and the effect are output by means for controlling the effect. Most of the resin members constituting the appearance of the door 104 are translucent, and the decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent member. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the game state and the effect by means of controlling the effect, and plays a role of the effect by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a large winning opening 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port 33 on the game area 81 partitioned by the rail 82. , Out port 34, effect display device 60, center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over the substantially central portion of the game area 81 and the upper portion and the right portion thereof, and is a flow path of the game ball and the effect display device. It has 60 functions such as protection and decoration. A stage 65 on which the inflowing game ball rolls is formed at the lower part of the center decoration 64, and the falling direction from the stage 65 is the direction of entering the first starting port 11 and the first starting port 11 depending on the rolling method. It is distributed to the side direction that does not enter the ball. At the upper part of the center decoration 64, a movable accessory 66 that is driven according to the content of the effect and performs an effect is provided. In the game area 81, a plurality of mechanisms such as game nails and windmills (not shown) for forming a flow path of the game ball are installed. In this specification, "winning ball", "winning", and "falling in" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning opening and each entry opening may be composed of a "passing opening" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") of a type through which a game ball passes, and the "entry ball" may be formed. "Prize," "fall," and "pass" may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting port 11 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first game, and the second starting opening 12 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that the ball can be aimed at one side depending on the launch strength of the game ball according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided at a substantially central lower portion in the game area 81, and the second starting port 12 is provided directly below the first starting port 11. Left-handed, that is, when the ball is hit relatively weakly aiming to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, while right-handed. That is, when the ball is hit relatively strongly aiming to flow to the right passage of the center decoration 64, the ball can enter the second starting port 12 or is easy to enter, but cannot enter the first starting port 11. Alternatively, a flow path is formed by arranging the game nails so as to make it difficult to enter the ball. However, since the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is normally covered with the first starting port 11 to prevent the inflow of the game ball, the second starting port 12 is not opened unless the expanding mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball in 12. The winning / failing lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player, and is executed every time a ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. To.

The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to the extent that it is possible to strike a target depending on the firing strength of the game ball. The first start port 11 and the second start port 12 may be installed separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, respectively, so that it is difficult for a game ball aiming at one to enter the other. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when it is left-handed, that is, when it is aimed to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64 and fired relatively weakly. The second starting port 12 is provided at a position where the ball can be entered or is easily entered when the ball is hit right-handed, that is, when the ball is launched relatively strongly aiming at flowing to the right passage of the center decoration 64.

The first starting port 11 includes a first starting winning detection device 16. The first start winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, and generates first starting winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting winning detection device 17, an ordinary electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) which is an expansion mechanism, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 90. Be prepared. The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 12, and generates second starting winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry.

The first operating port 31 is provided at a position on the left side of the game area 81 and includes the first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The second operating port 32 is provided at a position on the right side of the game area 81 and includes the second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operating port 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The passage of the game ball through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an open lottery to determine whether or not to expand the ordinary electric accessory 90. When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol, which is a symbol showing the determination result of the open lottery, is variably displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. Therefore, the open lottery is also called "ordinary symbol lottery". After a predetermined time has passed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stops. When the normal symbol stops at the hit symbol, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91, and the possibility of entering the second starting port 12 is increased. As a modification, the number of operating ports may be one, and the game area 81 may be provided at the left side position.

Each of the three general winning openings 33 includes a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry.

The large winning opening 20 includes a large winning opening detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a large winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large winning opening 20. The grand prize detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the grand prize opening 20, and generates the grand prize opening winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The big winning opening 20 is a horizontally rectangular winning opening that opens as a "big hit" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined mode. The large winning opening 20 is provided at a position on the upper right side of the out opening 34. As a modified example, another large winning opening may be provided in the lower center of the game area 81 or above or below the large winning opening 20, and a plurality of large winning openings may be provided. The out port 34 is an outlet for discharging game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings, and includes an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball that is discharged through the out port 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out opening 34 is provided at the lowermost center portion of the game area 81 so that all the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings can be guided and passed through. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be provided side by side while securing a game ball passage having a sufficient width to prevent the out port 34 from being clogged with balls.

A symbol display unit 120 is arranged below the outside of the game area 81 on the game board 80. The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display unit 41, a second special symbol display unit 42, a first special symbol hold display unit 71, a second special symbol hold display unit 72, a normal symbol display unit 45, and a normal symbol. Each display unit such as a hold display unit 75, a game status display unit 76, and an abnormality notification unit 77 is provided. Specifically, the first special symbol display unit 41 corresponding to the first game and the second special symbol display unit 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the first special symbol The variations of 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, and is a special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. A big hit will occur. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12, and is a special game when stopped in a predetermined hit mode. A big hit will occur. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 are 8-segment LEDs composed of, for example, 7 segments forming a "figure 8" and 8 segments of 1 segment representing a "dot". It is a display device of. With an 8-segment LED, a numerical value equivalent to 8 bits can be expressed by combining 8 segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 represented by the combination of segments do not necessarily form the body of letters or numbers, and may be generally meaningless symbols formed by the combination of each segment. .. These symbols are replaced one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42, or a predetermined display (for example, "-") and non-display (for example, all lights are turned off) are displayed. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after being repeated for a predetermined time, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 use LED dot arrays that are not 8-segment LEDs, and a plurality of types of first special symbol 51 and second are used depending on the combination of lighting patterns and lighting colors. The special symbol 52 may be expressed.

Further, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have to have a directing role, in this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol at the lower left of the game area 81 are required. The display unit 42 displays the image in an inconspicuous size. However, when adopting a method of expressing the special symbol without using a decorative symbol by giving it a directing role, the special symbol is displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. It may be configured to be made to.

A first special symbol holding display unit 71 is provided above the first special symbol display unit 41 as a holding lamp for special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first game, and a second special symbol display unit 42 is provided above the second special symbol display unit 42. The second special symbol hold display unit 72 is provided as a hold lamp for the special symbol change corresponding to the game of. The first special figure hold display unit 71 is composed of two lamps, and the number of the winning / failing lottery values held in the first game is determined by the number of lighting or the number of blinking lamps (hereinafter, the number of the winning / losing lottery values held). (Simply also called "holding number") is displayed. The number of holds on the first special figure hold display unit 71 is the number (number) of acquisitions of lottery values based on winning a prize in the first start port 11 while the first special symbol 51 is changing or the special game is being executed. Indicates the number of winning balls that are present and the symbol change has not yet been executed. The second special figure hold display unit 72 is also composed of two lamps, and displays the number of holdes in the second game according to the number of lights or the number of blinks. The number of holds in the second special figure hold display unit 72 is the number of times (number) of lottery values obtained based on winning a prize in the second starting port 12 while the second special symbol 52 is changing or the special game is being executed. Indicates the number of winning balls that are present and the symbol change has not yet been executed. The number of hold of the winning / failing lottery value is also displayed at the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 60 in a form represented by the number of lighting of the hold lamp image.

A normal symbol display unit 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120. For convenience, the ordinary symbol display unit 45 is composed of two lamps, and the display state of the ordinary symbol is expressed by the lighting combination thereof. First, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is expressed by blinking the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, and finally the stop symbol of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of the lighting states of the first lamp and the second lamp. Is expressed. For example, turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp expresses the stop symbol of disconnection, turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp expresses the first hitting mode, and the first The second hit mode is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

Further, on the right side of the normal symbol display unit 45, a normal symbol hold display unit 75 is provided as a hold lamp for changing the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold display unit 75 is also composed of two lamps, and displays the number of hold of normal symbol fluctuations according to the number of lighting or the number of blinking. The number of reserved normal symbol changes is the number of game balls that have passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during the changing of the normal symbol, and is the number of ordinary symbol lottery for which the change of the normal symbol has not yet been executed. Is shown.

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game status display unit 76 and an abnormality notification unit 77. The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that displays a display corresponding to a game state such as a specific game state described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, each game state is notified by turning on the lamp when the probability is fluctuating, blinking when the ball is easy to enter, and turning off when the ball is in the normal state, and the 7-segment LED during the execution of the special game. Displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies a part of the abnormality of the game machine. For example, the abnormality notification unit 77 is composed of a plurality of lamps and notifies the abnormality by a lighting pattern according to the type of abnormality. In addition, these display units may not be centrally arranged in the symbol display unit 120, and each display unit may be individually configured, or may be divided into a plurality of display devices which are appropriately arranged. Further, the notification of the gaming state such as the specific gaming state may be configured to be performed only for a predetermined period such as a certain time after returning from the power failure.

In the substantially center of the game area 81, an effect display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center decoration 64, and the decorative symbol 61 linked to the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is provided. Display the fluctuation of the production image including. Hereinafter, such a display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display".

The effect display device 60 is a display device including a liquid crystal display that variablely displays the decorative symbol 61 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. The decorative symbol 61 is a symbol for visually producing the determination result display of the lottery shown by the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. As the decorative symbol 61, the effect display device 60 displays, for example, a moving image in which a plurality of rows of symbols imitating a game of a slot machine are varied in a central region of the screen. In this embodiment, the symbols composed of the numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in three columns and varied, and the hit or miss is indicated by the combination of the three symbols that are finally stopped and displayed. Each of the plurality of symbols constituting the decorative symbol 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns, and these numbers, letters, and symbols are common to all symbols. It may be configured by adding a different pattern to each and integrating them. This pattern is a pattern on which a motif related to the theme of decoration or production set in the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is drawn, and may be, for example, a pattern on which a character of a person or an animal is drawn. The decorative design 61 is switched between the case where the design including the design is integrally displayed and the case where the design is separated and only the numbers, letters, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the development of the effect. It may be configured to be. In the background of the variable display of the decorative symbol 61, a moving image having a directing effect related to the theme of the decoration or effect set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the variation of the symbol.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display which is a high-definition dot matrix type display device, but the width of the display area may be about half the width of the game area, or a large size exceeding half. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the effect display device is formed with a passage width sufficient for one game ball to pass through, and if the player launches the so-called "right-handed" with the maximum strength, the right-hand passage will almost certainly occur. The game ball can be passed through, and it can be distinguished from the so-called "left-handed". The effect display device 60 may be composed not only of a single display device but also of a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of a plurality of displays, displays of different sizes such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal may be combined, the sub liquid crystal may be arranged at a position adjacent to the main liquid crystal, or a position other than the game board, for example, a firing handle. It may be installed in the vicinity of (upper ball plate, right decorative lamp, etc.). When installed in the vicinity of the launch handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that can be operated and input by the player. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by a display device such as an organic EL display, a mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type, or a display means such as an LED matrix type. ..

The effect button 109 is an operation input means that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the game machine according to the effect content, and the effect content and the like are changed according to the pressing mode. The effect button 109 is provided on the front frame 102. The effect button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the effect button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 are oriented substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be projected. The rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 function as a lever 112 in a state of projecting to the outside, and the player can hold the effect button 109 and pull the lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the game machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input means for the player to input a direction instruction to the game machine, and is provided on the outer wall surface on the left side of the upper ball plate 105.

The game method and control flow performed in the game machine having the above configuration will be outlined. When the player manually rotates the launch handle 107, the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 105 are guided one by one to the rail 82 and launched into the game area 81 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle. .. When the player fixes the rotation position of the firing handle 107 by hand, the firing of the game ball is repeated at regular time intervals. The game ball launched to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center decoration 64, and the like, and falls in a direction corresponding to the way of hitting. When a game ball falls into each of the general winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the large winning opening 20, the winning ball according to the type of the winning opening is the upper ball plate 105 or the lower. It is paid out to the ball plate 106. The game ball that has fallen into each winning opening such as the general winning opening 33 is treated as a safe ball, and the game ball that has fallen into the out opening 34 is treated as an out ball. The specification may be such that the discharge of the safe sphere is excluded from the detection by the out detection device 39, or the safe sphere is also guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all the discharge is detected by the out detection device 39. May be. Alternatively, the specification may be such that the guidance of the safe sphere and the detection of the safe sphere by the out detection device 39 are not performed, and the total of the number of detected spheres of the safe sphere added to the number of detected spheres of the out sphere is used as the number of discharged spheres.

Further, when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is variably displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45, and is stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to the display. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode or the second hit mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded based on the hit mode of the stopped and displayed symbol and the game state when the stop is displayed. .. That is, when the gaming state when the symbol is stopped is the normal gaming state and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. Further, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode in the specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state), the normal symbol is in the second hit mode in the normal state and the specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state). When the stop display is displayed, a long opening for 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long opening are set so as to differ depending on the game state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol wins with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening in that case (the probability that the winning symbol of the first winning mode is selected) is 1 /. 3. The execution probability of long opening (probability of selecting the hit symbol of the second hit mode) is set to 2/3. Further, in the open lottery in the specific game state (for example, the ball entry easy state), the normal symbol is hit with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability of the first hit mode and the second hit mode is the same as that in the normal game state. However, it is set so that the long opening is executed regardless of the winning mode. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, the function of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol (probability change from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the opening time (the opening time when the stop is displayed in the first hit mode is 0). The ease of entering the second starting port 12 is improved by (extending from .1 second to 6.0 seconds). The function of extending the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (long opening) may be referred to as "opening extension".

In addition, as described above, by setting the probability of long opening to be higher than the probability of short opening in the normal state, the long opening is executed at a constant rate even in the normal state when the normal symbol is won. .. As a modification, on the contrary, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening, the specification may have the same probability of both, or the specification may always be short opening. Good. Further, when the ball is in the easy-to-enter state, the ease of entering the second starting port 12 may be enhanced by using three functions including a function of shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. In that case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state. The winning probability of the open lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the normal electric accessory 90 may be expanded only when the open lottery is performed in the easy-to-enter state. Further, when the normal electric accessory 90 expands, it may be notified in advance to that effect, the hold of the normal symbol change may be pre-read and notified before the start of the change of the normal symbol, or the normal symbol may be notified. It may be notified during the fluctuation.

As a modification of the opening mode when the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is increased to about 6 seconds by repeating the opening for 2 seconds, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It may be an embodiment. In addition, a plurality of combinations of opening time and opening number may be prepared, and one of them may be selected. For example, when the 2-second opening is performed 3 times, the total opening time is the same as when the 6-second opening is performed once, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modified example in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the former player enters the ball assuming that the player who notices the opening adjusts the hitting direction to the second starting port 12 from that point. It can be said that the chance is long. Further, it may be configured so that there are a plurality of hit types of ordinary symbols, and the opening mode of the expansion mechanism may be different depending on the hit types. For example, when the normal symbol is the first hit, the 0.1 second opening is set once in the normal state, the 1 second opening is set three times in the easy-to-enter state, and the second hit is the normal state. Then, the 6-second opening may be performed once, and the 2-second opening may be performed twice in the easy-to-enter state.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the first special symbol display unit 41, the second special symbol display unit 42, and the effect display device 60. , And the decorative symbol 61 are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the variation display time determined prior to the display has elapsed. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to a variable pattern in which the variation mode from the start to the stop of the variation is defined. The decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed according to a variable effect pattern in which the variation mode from the start to the stop of the variation is defined. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns and fluctuation production patterns are prepared, and each has various fluctuation times, long and short. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variablely displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed according to the variation effect pattern having the same variation time. In the variation pattern, the variation display time is set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the variation of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 occurs when the variation display time elapses. It will be stopped. Hereinafter, the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 displayed according to the variation effect pattern will be illustrated, and the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. Details of the variation pattern and the method of determining the variation effect pattern will be described separately.

As an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol 61, first, when the variation starts, the symbols are varied in all three rows like the reel rotation of the slot machine, and when the variation end timing is approached, the symbols are stopped one by one in the final stop mode. The symbol combination as is displayed. As an operation when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 190 is stopped, it may be controlled to stop a plurality of rows at the same time instead of one row at a time so that the effect display other than the decorative symbol is noticed during the variable display, or the effect display other than the decorative symbol may be noticed in a shorter fluctuation time. It may be possible to display the symbol variation. In addition, as an operation at the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 190, control is performed so as to delay the start of fluctuation of a part of the columns according to the subsequent development (type of effect pattern, etc.) in the fluctuation to produce a feeling of expectation. It may be.

Next, the variable effect pattern will be briefly described. The variable effect pattern includes a normal off effect pattern, a reach out effect pattern, and a reach jackpot effect pattern. The normal out-of-order effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying a normal out-of-order symbol combination. The out-of-reach effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying a combination of out-of-reach symbols through a reach state, which is a state in which one more symbol is aligned and a big hit is made. The reach jackpot effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying the symbol combination of the jackpot after the reach state. In particular, the pattern when going through the reach state includes a pattern having various fluctuation times, long and short, and a reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called "super reach". ". The normal out-of-reach effect pattern, the reach-out effect pattern, and the reach jackpot effect pattern are divided into a normal pattern displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in a time-saving state, respectively. However, even in the normal state, if the second symbol fluctuates corresponding to the entry of the ball into the second starting port 12, the probability that the jackpot will be accompanied by a probability change or the number of unit games of the special game will increase is the first. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first fluctuation corresponding to the entry of the ball into the 1 start port 11, a pattern for chance effect indicating that the chance is a relatively advantageous jackpot may be used. In the embodiment, the time saving pattern is used in the time saving state, but since the time saving is accompanied in the probability changing state, the time saving pattern is also used in the probability changing state. However, in the modified example, the specification may be such that a pattern for probability variation different from that for time saving is used in the probability variation state. Alternatively, a specification that uses a common pattern for time saving and probability variation may be used, or a specification that uses a probability variation pattern in the probability variation state without particularly using the time reduction pattern may be used.

When the number of pending win / loss lottery reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of a loss is shortened than usual in order to improve the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "shortening variation"). Similarly, when the number of winning / failing lottery pending is 4, the symbol fluctuation time in the case of losing is further shortened as compared with the case of the above 3 in order to further improve the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "super shortened fluctuation"). ). When the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in the stop mode showing a big hit after the above-mentioned symbol variation, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 20 is started. The stop mode of the decorative symbol 61 showing the jackpot is, for example, a combination mode in which the types of the three symbols match.

There are two types of special games, normal special games and shortened special games, and there is a big difference in the profits from the winning prize balls. Usually, the special game is started by displaying the production screen called the start demo time. After the screen display of the start demo time, the big winning opening 20 is opened, and the opening is continued for about 30 seconds, or is temporarily closed after 9 or more game balls have fallen. The process from opening to closing of the large winning opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but there may be a case where a plurality of short-time openings are repeated during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the large winning opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 or 16 times, the special game is usually ended by the display of the effect screen called the end demo time. In normal special games, you can expect enough balls to enter 9 or more balls per unit game, and you can get enough prize balls (also called "balls") by 16 unit games, which is a big profit. Is obtained. A special game in which 16 unit games are repeated is appropriately referred to as a "16R jackpot", and a special game in which four unit games are repeated is appropriately referred to as a "4R jackpot". Although the unit game is repeated 16 times, the unit game is substantially repeated a small number of times by opening the large winning opening 20 for a shorter time (for example, 1.6 seconds) than usual in some unit games. It is also possible to realize a normal special game similar to the one (sometimes referred to as "substantial nR jackpot").

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demo time and the end demo time are short or almost nonexistent (0.1 seconds, etc.), and the large winning opening 20 is opened for 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice to end the shortened special game. In the shortened special game, since the opening of the large winning opening 20 is only repeated twice for a very short time, it is almost impossible to enter the large winning opening 20 and the number of balls is substantially equal to zero. is there. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also appropriately referred to as a "2R jackpot". Although the number of unit games is the same as that of the normal special game, the shortened special game can be realized by opening the large winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all the unit games.

Further, when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in the predetermined small hit mode after the above-mentioned symbol variation, the small hit game composed of one unit game The opening and closing operation of the grand prize opening 20 is executed. In one unit game constituting the small hit game, the big winning opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds, and the operation mode is similar to the 2R big hit in appearance.

When a special game occurs and the hit stop symbol at that time is in a specific mode (for example, "777"), the probability change, which is one of the specific games, is further started after the end of the special game. During the probability change, a winning / losing lottery with a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game may occur relatively early. It should be noted that the fact that the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery is a specific big hit, that is, a big hit accompanied by a probability change is not clearly shown from the appearance, and a latent probability change state that is not explicitly notified as a decorative pattern or an effect content may be used. In that case, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether the change is probable or non-probable even during the probable change. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be clearly shown to the effect display device 60 whether it is a probable change or a non-probable change.

In the normal game after the special game is completed, the ball entry easy state, which is one of the specific game states, is started. In the easy-to-enter state, the winning probability of the open lottery is increased more than usual, and the opening extension is executed so that the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90 is extended. Since the number of hits of the normal symbol per fixed time can be increased and the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 12 is also increased, it is highly possible that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will increase. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12, it is possible to continue playing while hardly reducing the number of balls held or gradually increasing the number of balls held.

In the easy-to-enter state, as one of the specific game states, the so-called time reduction in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shorter than in the normal state is further executed. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after a predetermined number of fluctuations, for example, 100 fluctuations are displayed, but reaches the fluctuation number. If a big hit occurs before, the time reduction will end once. Since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened in the time saving, until a big hit occurs as compared with the case of the normal state where the symbol changes with the normal fluctuation time. The time can be shortened, and the ease of obtaining a big hit can be relatively increased. In the modified example, the specification may be such that the special symbol is not shortened in the easy-to-enter state.

FIG. 2 shows the basic structure of the pachinko machine on the back side. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and processes all game operations such as a lottery when winning a prize in the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151, controls the display content of the effect display device 60, and changes the effect display content particularly according to the determination result of the main board 200. The back setting mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for the prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out the prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball plate 105 according to the winning of each winning opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The launching device 156 launches the stored balls of the upper ball plate 105 into the game area 81 one by one. The launch control board 157 controls the launch operation of the launch device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies electric power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. A performance display unit 159 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200. The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number for the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the total of safe balls and out balls.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows a functional block of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Hereinafter, the functions realized by using each configuration will be described, but in the present specification, in order to match the physical configuration and the functional configuration, for example, a physical configuration such as a main board 200, a payout control board 155, a launch control board 157, etc. For the part already explained as, the term may be used as it is for convenience.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a power supply board 158 that generates a power source to be used in the gaming machine based on an AC power supply (AC24V or the like) supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. Main board 200, payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling prize ball payout, launch control board 157 for controlling launch of game balls to the game area, and directing operations and processing are controlled. It is configured in a form in which the functions are shared with the sub-board 300 as the sub-control device.

The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a large winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port group (first general winning port 33a, second general winning port). It is electrically connected to the port 33b), the out port 34, the symbol display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and various control signals are transmitted and received between them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a prize ball payout transmitted from the main board 200, a signal indicating the control state of the main board 200, and the like to indirectly transmit the launch control board 157. And control the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launch device 156, and the ball feed device 164, and the ball feed device 164 and the launch device 164 and the launch device are launched based on the launch permission signal transmitted from the payout control board 155. The device 156 is controlled to launch a game ball. The sub-board 300 includes an effect display device 60, a movable accessory 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), a speaker 108, an effect input operation device 115 (effect button 109, cross key 110), a decorative lamp 111, and electrical. It is connected to and sends and receives various control signals to and from each.

Data transmission / reception between the main board 200 and the sub board 300 is unidirectional from the main board 200 to the sub board 300. Each configuration for realizing the entire operation by data transmission / reception in one direction is the main board 200. It is arranged on the sub-board 300. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub board 300 to the configuration included in the main board 200, and data transmission is performed. I can't even request it. Therefore, the sub-board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Further, data is transmitted / received in both directions between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155, and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157. However, as in the case between the main board 200 and the sub board 300, data can be transmitted and received from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155 in one direction, or from the payout control board 155 to the launch control board 157 in one direction. It may be configured to send and receive data.

Note that the functional blocks included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the launch control board 157, and the sub board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modification, some functional blocks are mounted on other boards. It may be mounted. For example, the functional block included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional block included in the launch control board 157 may be mounted on the payout control board 155. Good. Further, for example, a part of the functional block included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the main board 200, or the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. May be divided into a plurality of substrates to form one functional block as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination means 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary judgment means 235, a general drawing lottery means 213, a hold control means 240, and a main board. Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small hit game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening / closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, The main error detecting means 284 and the command communication means 205 are provided.

<Ball entry determination means 201>
The ball entry determination means 201 determines the entry of a game ball into each winning opening. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives the first start winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the first start opening 11, and when it receives the second start winning information, the game ball has won the second start opening 12. to decide. When the winning ball determining means 201 receives the large winning opening winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the large winning opening 20, and when it receives the general winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the general winning opening 33. Upon receiving the passing information, the ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. Upon receiving the discharge information, the ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34. The ball entry determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the total of the safe balls and the out balls, and displays them on the performance display unit 159.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various determinations in the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the general drawing lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation means 202 has random numbers (also referred to as “win / fail lottery values”) used in the win / loss lottery by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 from “0” to “65535”. A random number in the range is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 is "0" to "255" as random numbers (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in symbol determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227. Random numbers in the range up to are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 has "0" to "255" as random numbers (also referred to as "variation pattern determination lottery values") used in the determination of the variation pattern by the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Random numbers in the range up to "" are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "99" as a random number used in the winning / losing lottery by the general drawing lottery means 213 by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "2" as a random number used when determining a normal symbol by a predetermined means. The "random numbers" here are not only physical random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit and genuine random numbers in the mathematical sense, but also pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter and software random numbers using a random number generation algorithm. But it may be. Alternatively, it may be a random number generated by combining a hardware random number and a software random number. Further, as the random numbers acquired by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212, the random numbers generated by the same generation means may be acquired, or the random numbers generated by another generation means may be acquired. ..

<Public map lottery means 213>
When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol lottery means 213 generates random numbers of a random number used for winning / failing lottery of the normal symbol and a random number used for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol. Obtain from 202 and execute the lottery. The ordinary symbol lottery means 213 has a normal symbol winning / failing determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct, and a normal symbol determination that is referred to for determining the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol to be displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 45. Hold the table. The normal symbol winning / failing judgment table defines the correspondence between the lottery value for winning / failing and the winning, and the normal symbol judgment table defines the correspondence between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol. The hit / fail and stop symbols of the normal symbol are determined based on the hit probability and the symbol selection probability. When the lottery value for the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol corresponds to the hit, the ordinary symbol lottery means 213 determines the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol by referring to the ordinary symbol determination table, and the lottery value for the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol is set. When it corresponds to the deviation, the mode of the deviation symbol of 1 is always determined. When the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol corresponds to a hit and the normal symbol stops at a predetermined symbol (first hit mode or second hit mode), the opening / closing control means 275, which will be described later, changes the mode of the stop symbol and the game state. The ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded accordingly. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds at the short opening and 6 seconds at the long opening. The lottery value of the ordinary symbol is temporarily held by the hold control means 240 described later. However, the lottery value is held only when the predetermined upper limit number of holds held by the hold control means 240 is not exceeded.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 has a function of executing the first lottery related to the first game, such as a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first hit / fail determination means 221 and a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination. The first winning / failing lottery is executed as a winning / failing lottery corresponding to the entry of the ball into the first starting port 11, including the means 231. Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 makes a variable display of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second winning / failing determination means 222, a second symbol determining means 227, and a second variation pattern determining means 232, and corresponds to entering a ball into the second starting port 12. The second winning / failing lottery is executed as a winning / failing lottery. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 makes a variable display of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers for various lottery and determination by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the first start port 11. Specifically, the first winning / failing lottery value for winning / failing determination by the first winning / failing determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determining means 226, and the first variation pattern. The first pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determination means 231 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires random numbers for various lottery and determination by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the second starting port 12. Specifically, the second winning / failing lottery value for determining the winning / failing by the second winning / failing determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determining means 227, and the second variation pattern. The second pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determination means 232 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means.

The first winning / failing determination means 221 executes a winning / failing determination for determining whether or not to shift to the special game based on the first winning / failing lottery value. The second winning / failing determination means 222 executes a winning / failing determination for determining whether or not to shift to the special game based on the second winning / failing lottery value. In the hit / fail judgment, more specifically, "big hit" indicating that the game shifts to the special game, "small hit" indicating that the game shifts to the small hit game, and "small hit" indicating that the game does not shift to the special game and the small hit game. It is determined whether it corresponds to "off". The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 hold a hit / fail determination table referred to in the hit / fail determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the hit / fail judgment executed when starting the symbol variation from the preliminary hit / fail judgment described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "hit / fail judgment as the main judgment". In the present specification, when the term "table" or "selection criterion" is used, the correspondence between the first parameter such as the lottery value and the second parameter such as the value indicating the option is strictly defined by the table structure. In addition to pointing to data, it is also broadly included to be realized by a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter as such a correspondence. Including them, the concept is substantially synonymous with "table" and is appropriately referred to as "selection criteria". In addition, when a table structure is used, the selection criteria that are substantially one type may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables, but the term "multiple types of selection criteria" is subdivided. Shows the actual number of table types, not the number of tableized tables.

The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 hold a table corresponding to each hit / fail determination as a hit / fail determination table to be referred to in the hit / fail determination. Specifically, a hit / fail judgment table for hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means 221 (also referred to as “first hit / miss judgment table”) and a hit / fail judgment table for hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means 222 (“second hit / miss judgment table”). A table to be referred to is selected according to the success / failure judgment to be executed by holding the "win / fail judgment table"). In the plurality of winning / failing determination tables, the determination results of big hit, small hit, and miss are associated with the winning / failing lottery value, and the winning / failing probability is determined according to the range setting of the associated big hit.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a hit / fail determination table. In the winning / failing judgment table of this figure, the judgment results of big hit, small hit, and miss are associated with the winning / failing lottery value, and the winning / failing probability of the big hit and the winning / failing probability of the small hit are associated with each associated range setting. Is decided. The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 refer to the pass / fail determination table of the present figure in the hit / fail determination as the present determination. In both the first winning / failing lottery by the first winning / failing determination means 221 and the second winning / failing lottery by the second winning / failing determination means 222, a big hit is normally obtained only when the winning / failing lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299. At the time of probability change, the range of big hits is expanded, and the big hits are obtained not only when the winning / failing lottery value corresponds to the range of 0 to 299 but also when it corresponds to the range of 300 to 2999. In this way, the range corresponding to the jackpot changes according to the gaming state. In this figure, a single hit / fail judgment table shows the jackpot range for both normal time and probability change, but the hit / fail judgment table may be prepared separately for normal time and probability change, and the first It may be prepared separately for one winning / failing lottery and for the second winning / failing lottery.

In this embodiment, even if the winning / failing lottery value does not correspond to the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, it becomes a small hit. In the example of this figure, when the winning / failing lottery value acquired by the first winning / failing determination means 221 corresponds to the range of 56500 to 65535, a small hit is obtained, and the winning / failing lottery value acquired by the second winning / failing determination means 222 is 64000 to 65535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the first winning / failing lottery has a wider range of small hits than the second winning / failing lottery, and small hits are more likely to occur. In this way, if it does not correspond to the big hit, it is originally all "off", but in the example of this figure, if it does not correspond to the big hit, it does not correspond to the small hit. Is particularly expressed as "off". That is, when "hit or not" is considered from the viewpoint of "whether or not it is a big hit", "small hit" may be included in "missing" in a broad sense in the sense of "not a big hit". In addition, when "hit or not" is considered from the viewpoint of "hit or not", "small hit" may be included in "hit" in a broad sense together with "big hit". In this figure, an example is shown in which the judgment table for big hits and the judgment table for small hits are realized in the form of a single hit / fail judgment table, but even if each is realized as a separate table. Good. Further, the "small hit" may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may not be provided in any of the games. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding hit / fail judgment table.

<1st symbol determining means 226 and 2nd symbol determining means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stopped symbol at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol based on the symbol lottery value acquired from the random number generating means 202 and the result of the winning / failing determination. .. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables referred to for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determining means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second symbol determining means 227 holds the hit / fail by the second hit / miss determination means 222. Holds a plurality of symbol judgment tables according to the judgment result. The first hit / miss determination means 221 holds a first symbol determination table at the time of a big hit, a first symbol determination table at the time of a small hit, and a first symbol determination table at the time of a miss, which is referred to at the time of a small hit. The second hit / miss determination means 222 holds a second symbol determination table at the time of a big hit, a second symbol determination table at the time of a small hit, and a second symbol determination table at the time of a miss, which is referred to at the time of a small hit. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 select a symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol variation from the preliminary symbol determination described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "symbol determination as the main determination".

FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 6A is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, FIG. 6B is a table to be referred to when the hit / miss judgment result is wrong, and FIG. 6C is a table to be referred to. This is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of the present figure in the symbol determination as the present determination. In each symbol determination table, the correspondence between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the type of the special symbol and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value is defined. The types of special symbols are associated with the hit / miss judgment results of big hit, small hit, and miss, respectively. "0" to "4" correspond to big hit, and "5" to "9" correspond to small hit. "10" corresponds to the disconnection. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by a combination of segments.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the types of special symbols "0" to "4" are associated with the presence or absence of the jackpot and the probability fluctuation after the jackpot. Specifically, the type "0" indicates a 16R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, is associated with "0 to 99" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and is "0 to 99" in the case of the second symbol lottery value. 144 ”. The type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot (or "substantially 4R hit") with a probability variation as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and in the case of the second symbol lottery value. It is associated with "145-149". The type "2" indicates a 2R jackpot accompanied by a probability change, and the type "2" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "150 to 189". The type "3" indicates a 16R jackpot that is not accompanied by a probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "3" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "150 to 189". The type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot that is not accompanied by a probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (that is, the content of the jackpot and the presence or absence of subsequent probability fluctuations) is determined by the size of the range of the symbol lottery value.

In addition, it is possible to provide more types of special symbols, and in that case, by configuring so that one jackpot type is determined corresponding to a plurality of special symbol types, the jackpot can be increased while increasing the symbol types. You can set fewer types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide into more jackpot types in response to the increased number of symbol types. Further, it is possible to provide different symbol types at the time of the first lottery and at the time of the second lottery. In this case, one jackpot type is configured to correspond to each of the type of special symbol selected at the time of the first lottery and the type of special symbol selected at the time of the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set the ratio of probability fluctuations to be the same in the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 6B, the type "10" is associated with the symbol lottery value in the entire range in the case where the winning / failing determination result is wrong. Therefore, it is determined that the same special symbol is always stopped and displayed in the case of deviation. It is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols to be stopped and displayed in case of disconnection.

As shown in FIG. 6 (c), the types of special symbols "5" to "9" are associated with small hits. The type "5" is associated with the range "0 to 49" of the symbol lottery value, and the type "6" is associated with the range "50 to 99" of the symbol lottery value. The type "7" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "100 to 149", the type "8" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "150 to 199", and the type "9" is the symbol lottery value range. It is associated with "200 to 255".

In this embodiment, in order to save the storage area in the main board 200, the table of FIG. 6 is also referred to as the pre-symbol determination table in the pre-symbol determination. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine that the value of "0" to "10" indicating the type of the special symbol as a result of the preliminary symbol determination is the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of holds. It should be noted that, as the pre-design judgment table, one that can be further subdivided and complicated judgment can be performed, or one in which the judgment range of the jackpot symbol that executes the same special game is summarized and simplified may be used. .. In addition, when the symbol is uniformly determined at the time of disengagement as in this embodiment, a specific symbol can be selected without referring to the acquired symbol lottery value and without preparing a symbol determination table for disengagement. You may decide.

<First variation pattern determining means 231 and second variation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determining means 231 acquires, from the random number generating means 202, a variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is defined. It is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determining means 232 uses the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined as the second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202. Based on this, it is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 respectively refer to the variation pattern table when starting the symbol variation to determine the variation pattern of the symbol variation. Further, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 execute a preliminary pattern determination as to which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232, and the control means of the main board 200, refer to the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and the start port. The pre-pattern judgment table used for information generation for the execution judgment of the look-ahead process at the time of entering the ball is held or shared. The fluctuation pattern defines the fluctuation time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and has various fluctuation times, long and short, depending on the type. That is, in each fluctuation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is defined, the variation display time is substantially set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the special symbol is set when the variation display time elapses. Fluctuation is stopped. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern determination executed at the start of the symbol variation is also appropriately referred to as "variation pattern determination as the main determination" in order to distinguish it from the prior pattern determination. Further, in order to contribute to the selection of the variation effect pattern of the decorative pattern described later, it may be defined as a different type of variation pattern with the same variation time.

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 refer to the table of the present figure (a) in the normal state and refer to the table of the present figure (b) in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 7A, when the winning / failing judgment result is incorrect in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "0", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, the normal reach of the pattern range number "2" is selected "normal 1", and if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, the normal reach of the pattern range number "3" is "normal". 2 ”is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, "out of reach" of the pattern range number "4" is selected. As "out of reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of holds, a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds when the number of holds is 0 to 2, a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds when the number of holds is 3, and a number of holds. When is 4, a 4-second fluctuation pattern is selected.

In this figure, an example of mainly classifying into five types according to the fluctuation time will be described, but a plurality of fluctuation effect patterns are prepared for each of the fluctuation patterns in the sub-board 300, and dozens of types of variation effect patterns are prepared in total. Is equivalent to being associated with the lottery value range of each category.

The range of the pattern lottery values assigned to "normal 1", "normal 2", and "out of reach" also differs depending on the number of reservations. When the number of holds is 0, 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of holds increases, the lottery value range of "normal 1" and "normal 2" becomes narrower, and the lottery value of "out of reach" The range becomes wider. The smaller the number of holds, the wider the lottery value range of the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time, and the probability that the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time will be selected increases. Therefore, the smaller the number of holds, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of holds, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a fluctuation pattern table in which the correspondence between the pattern lottery value range and the fluctuation pattern is different for each number of holds, it is possible to realize control in which a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is easily selected when the number of holds is small.

In the normal state, when the winning / failing judgment result is 4R jackpot or 16R jackpot, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "5", is selected and the pattern lottery value is set. If it is 124 to 248, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "6", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, the normal reach of the pattern range number "7" is selected "normal 1", and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, the normal reach of the pattern range number "8" is "normal". 2 ”is selected.

If the winning / failing judgment result is a 2R big hit or a small hit in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, "Super 3", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "9", is selected and the pattern lottery value is set. If it is 123 to 255, "normal 3", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "10", is selected.

When the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 transmit the pre-determination result to the effect determining means 303 as a so-called look-ahead result, the value (0 to 10) of the pattern range number is set to the first correctness. It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is a lottery or a second winning / failing lottery and the number of holds. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, it is illustrated that a table is provided for each of the winning / failing determination results in the preliminary pattern determination. However, regardless of the winning / failing lottery result, the random number value is approximately 1 using the prior pattern determination table. In addition to deriving only information regarding which range the sub-board is located in, the control means side of the sub-board 300 may be controlled to determine what kind of variation is executed together with the preliminary pass / fail determination result.

In the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 7B referred to in the time saving state, the pattern lottery value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern for time saving. However, the correspondence relationship between the range of the pattern lottery value and the fluctuation time is the same as that in FIG. “Reachless loss shortening” is a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as “reachless loss” in FIG. 7A. For "shortening without reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of holdings, a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds when the number of holdings is 0, 1 and a fluctuation pattern of 1 second when the number of holdings is 2-4. Are selected respectively. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables according to the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery and the second lottery is processed with priority over the first lottery, the second lottery is the first in spite of the easy entry state due to the shortened time. The situation in which the hold of the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the out-of-ball fluctuation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, a fluctuation pattern table is referred to in which a fluctuation pattern for a long time (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the fluctuation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of holdings. It may be that.

<Hold control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the hold control means 240 includes the special figure hold means 241 and the normal figure hold means 242. When the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value is newly acquired, the special figure holding means 241 changes the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value acquired before that. When is displayed, the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the newly acquired first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value is suspended, and the winning / failing lottery value is stored until the start of the variation display of the corresponding symbol. Here, for each of the first special symbols, up to four, the first winning / failing lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored, and for the second special symbol, each of them has an upper limit of four. The second winning / failing lottery value, the second symbol lottery value, and the second pattern lottery value are stored. The normal figure holding means 242 stores the normal figure lottery value acquired by the normal figure lottery means 213 as a holding ball. The number of these holds is represented by the number of lights or the number of blinks of the first special figure hold display unit 71, the second special figure hold display unit 72, and the normal figure hold display unit 75, respectively. The number of holds by the special figure holding means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60.

The lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery held by the special figure holding means 241 is preferentially digested over the lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery, and the symbol variation is displayed. Therefore, even if the jackpot lottery value is held as the first win / loss lottery, as long as the lottery value is held as the second win / loss lottery, the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot lottery value of the first win / loss lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if a big hit is held as the first winning or losing lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of consecutive big hits can be obtained by continuing to hit until the big hit is held as the second winning or losing lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special figure control means 251 and a second special figure control means 252, and a normal figure control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41 according to the variation pattern determined according to the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery by the first lottery means 211. Let me. The first special symbol control means 251 sets a new symbol variation start condition that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery performed before that has been completed. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42 according to the variation pattern determined according to the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery by the second lottery means 212. Let me. The second special symbol control means 252 also has a new symbol variation start condition that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery performed before that has been completed.

When the special figure holding means 241 stores the winning / failing lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery, the first special figure controlling means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery. On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / failing lottery regardless of whether or not the winning / failing lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery is stored by the special figure holding means 241. As a result, when the lottery value is held in both the first winning / failing lottery and the second winning / failing lottery, the lottery value held in the second winning / failing lottery is preferentially read out and the symbol variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning / failing lottery is not read and the symbol change does not start until the number of holdings in the second winning / failing lottery becomes 0.

The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 are changed by the command communication means 205 described later at the timing of starting and the timing of stopping the change display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When the fluctuation start command is transmitted, a value indicating each of the winning / failing judgment result, the stop symbol, and the fluctuation pattern determined or determined as the final judgment and a value indicating whether the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery is performed are set. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When the variable stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the variable stop command. Further, the effect determining means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a variation stop command, and the like to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variation display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized, and the interlocking is maintained. The normal symbol control means 254 causes the normal symbol display unit 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 213 as a variable display of the normal symbol.

<Special figure adjustment means 276>
The special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variable display of the other while the variable display of one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is displayed. The special figure adjusting means 276 has a second special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 12, regardless of the order in which the game ball has entered the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12. The variation display of 52 is prioritized over the variation display of the first special symbol 51 based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 11. For example, when both the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value are reserved, the second winning / failing lottery value is always preferentially digested, and the second special symbol 52 is continuously changed and displayed.

The special symbol adjusting means 276 in the modified example displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the variation of the second special symbol 52 according to the order of entering the balls into the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. It may be selectively changed and displayed. For example, when the ball enters in the order of the first starting port 11, the first starting port 11, and the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable order. Will be done. In this case, the special figure adjusting means 276 monitors the hold control means 240 and stores the hold order of the winning / failing lottery value. Since which special symbol should be changed is determined according to the ball entry order of the game ball, that is, the hold order of the winning / failing lottery value in the hold control means 240, the player can easily visually grasp the change order.

In another modification, the special symbol adjusting means 276 may display the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the ball entry order. Good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52. For example, when both the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value are reserved, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are alternately displayed in a variable manner. Since which special symbol should be changed is simply alternated regardless of the ball entry order of the game ball, the player can easily grasp the order of change.

The special symbol adjusting means 276 also waits for the start of the variation display of the other when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in the hitting mode. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbol is not started while the special game is executed, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary determination means 235>
The pre-determination means 235 includes a first lottery pre-determination means 236 and a second lottery pre-determination means 237. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 is a random number acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 before the execution of various determinations by the first winning / failing determination means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first variation pattern determination means 231. Is used to determine in advance information about the change before the start of the change of the first special symbol by the first special figure control means 251. The second lottery pre-determination means 237 is a random number acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before the execution of various determinations by the second winning / failing determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Is used to determine in advance information about the change before the start of the change of the second special symbol by the second special figure control means 252.

The first lottery pre-determination means 236 includes a first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table, a first pre-design lottery value determination table, and a first pre-variation pattern random value determination table as determination tables for pre-determination related to the first lottery means 211. Hold the table. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table to determine a random number group to which the first win / fail lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-symbol lottery value determination table to determine a random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-variation pattern determination table to determine a random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. Then, these determination results are temporarily stored as the pre-determination results, and the information regarding the pre-determination results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a preliminary hit / fail determination table referred to in the preliminary hit / fail determination. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the first game) refers to the first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table of FIG. 8A when entering the first starting port 11, and the win / fail lottery value. When is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary hit / fail judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value of "2" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "3000 to 56499", the value of "3" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "56500 to 65535", the value of "4" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. Next, the first symbol lottery value determination table (not shown) is referred to, and when the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", a value of "0" indicating that fact is set as the advance symbol determination result. .. When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. Further, referring to the first pre-variation pattern random number value determination table (not shown), when the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. .. When the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. When the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the first game) is the first start port 11 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry into the ball (indicating that it is the first winning / losing lottery), the information indicating the number of holds, and the like.

The second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the second game) refers to the second pre-win / fail lottery value determination table shown in FIG. 8B when the ball enters the second start port 12, and the win / fail lottery is performed. When the value is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary hit / fail judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value of "2" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing judgment result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "3000 to 63999", the value of "3" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "64,000 to 65535", the value of "4" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. Next, the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown) is referred to, and when the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", a value of "0" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. .. When the second symbol lottery value is "145-149", a value of "1" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that fact is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. Further, referring to the second pre-variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. .. When the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. When the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-judgment information set by the second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the second game) is the second start port 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. The information is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry into the ball (indicating that it is the second winning / losing lottery), the information indicating the number of holds, and the like.

It should be noted that various information temporarily stored as the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 is stored in a predetermined pre-determination result storage area up to 4 each, as in the case of the number of reserved storages. The preliminary determination result may be stored using the hold storage area stored by the hold control means 240. The information may be deleted based on the fact that the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. In this way, efficient use of the storage area on the main board 200 can be expected by sharing the information with other areas or erasing the information based on the completion of transmission. Further, as the judgment table for the preliminary judgment, the judgment table for the main judgment may be used without providing the table dedicated to the preliminary judgment, and the preliminary judgment regarding the first game and the preliminary judgment regarding the second game machine may be used. In some or all of them may share a common pre-judgment table. In this way, by sharing with other determination tables, it is expected that the data capacity of the main board 200 will be reduced. It should be noted that the content to be transmitted as the determination result of the pre-determination means 235 can be appropriately selected, for example, only the determination result of whether or not the result is transmitted. Further, the value of the random number acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 described above without being determined by the pre-determination means 235, and the sub-board It may be configured so that the content of the preliminary determination is determined by 300.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260 operates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the first winning or losing lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a shift to the special game. It is determined that the conditions have been met, and the special game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20. Similarly, when the special game control means 260 results in the second winning / failing lottery by the second lottery means 212 indicating a shift to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode. It is determined that the special game operating condition is satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20.

The special game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 20 is continuously performed a plurality of times in succession, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special game includes a 16R jackpot that repeats a unit game 16 times, a 4R jackpot that repeats a unit game four times, and a 2R jackpot that repeats a unit game with a shorter opening time than the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot only twice. The 16R jackpot is the jackpot in the second win / loss lottery, and the 4R jackpot is the jackpot in the first win / loss lottery. In the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot, in principle, the jackpot 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the jackpot 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is exhausted. Even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the jackpot 20 may be opened in the same opening mode as the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot.

<Small hit game control means 265>
The small hit game control means 265 operates the small hit game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small hit. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the small hit game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20 to the opening / closing control means 275. Similarly, the small hit game control means 265 is small when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a small hit. It is determined that the winning game operating condition is satisfied, and the small hit game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20 to the opening / closing control means 275.

In the small hit game, the unit game is executed once, and the large winning opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small hit game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for about 1.6 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the large winning opening 20 to end the small hit game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls a normal game in a probability variation state, a time saving state, and a ball entry easy state. When the special symbol is a specific jackpot symbol accompanied by a transition to the probability variation, the specific game control means 270 shifts the gaming state to the probability variation state, the time saving state, and the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game. The probabilistic state, the time saving state, and the easy-to-enter state are continued until the next big hit occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 select the variation pattern having a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is substantially shortened. To do. However, in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of winning / failing lottery values held by the holding control means 240 is referred to, and as the number of holdings by the holding control means 240 decreases, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time tends to appear. In the easy-to-enter state, both the probability change of the normal symbol and the opening extension of the second starting port 12 or the opening extension of the second starting port 12 are carried out. That is, the specific game control means 270 causes the second starting port 12 to be in the open extension state when a specific big hit occurs, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the winning / failing lottery is the second winning / failing lottery. It shifts to a probability change state higher than the normal probability state. During the probability change state, the hit / fail determination result by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 is maintained at a high probability of becoming a big hit.

<Open / close control means 275>
The opening / closing control means 275 controls the opening / closing of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the large winning opening 20 of the second starting port 12. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the open / close control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12. In the normal state, the opening / closing control means 275 opens the second starting port 12 with a short opening or long opening opening time according to the result of the open lottery, and in the easy ball entry state, the long opening opening time is the first. 2 The starting port 12 is opened. This is intended to improve the ease of entering the ball of the second starting port 12 so that the player can continue the game without reducing the number of balls held. In the special game, the open / close control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the large winning opening solenoid 92 to open the large winning opening 20.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial processing execution means 280 executes the control start processing of the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off and restored. The main power cutoff processing executing means 282 executes an abnormality response process such as a power supply cutoff process on the main board 200 when a power supply abnormality such as a power supply cutoff occurs. The main error detecting means 284 executes an abnormality detection process on the main board 200. The control start processing, the abnormality response processing, and the abnormality detection processing of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication means 205 transmits the payout control command communication means 206 for transmitting the control command necessary for executing the payout or the like to the payout control board 155, and the sub-control for transmitting the control command necessary for executing the effect control or the like to the sub-board 300. Includes command transmitting means 207. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command instructing the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening based on the determination of the winning ball to each winning opening by the winning ball determining means 201, and the main board 200. Send a command indicating the status of the error that occurred in. When the sub-control command transmission means 207 starts the symbol change, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol change to the effect determination means 303 together with the control command of the symbol change.

The sub-control command transmitting means 207 fluctuates at the timing when the first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 start and stop the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When the fluctuation start command is transmitted, a value indicating each of the winning / failing judgment result, the stop symbol, and the fluctuation pattern determined or determined as the final judgment and a value indicating whether the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery is performed are set. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When the variable stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the variable stop command. Further, the effect determining means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a variation stop command, and the like to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variation display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized, and the interlocking is maintained. Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the pre-determination result by the pre-determining means 235 to the effect determining means 303. After the pre-judgment result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, the winning openings (first start port 11, second start) corresponding to the pre-judgment result are started regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the lottery is started immediately. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the type information of the mouth 12), the information on the number of reserved pieces, the game state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, the so-called "look-ahead" process is realized in which the sub-board 300 can presumably recognize the hit / fail result before the order of starting the symbol variation comes around based on the received prior determination result. The processing based on the prior determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits information on the special game by the special game control means 260, information on the small hit game by the small hit game control means 265, and information on the lottery result by the ordinary symbol lottery means to the sub-board 300. Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 is transmitted to various controls on the main board 200 or to the main board 200, such as information on initial processing and information on errors by the main initial processing executing means 280 and the main error detecting means 284. Information about various signals and the like is appropriately transmitted to the sub-board 300.

FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes a symbol mode determining means 301, a pattern storage means 302, an effect determining means 303, an effect controlling means 304, a timekeeping means 307, an effect setting means 308, a sub initial process executing means 360, and a sub power cut processing executing means 362. It includes a sub-error detecting means 364, a command receiving means 370, and a sub-side pre-determining means 371.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of effect patterns in which the effect image contents to be displayed on the effect display device 60 and the display process thereof are defined when the decorative symbol 61 fluctuates. The effect pattern includes a plurality of variation effect patterns in which the variation process from the start to the stop of the variation in the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 and the effect process are defined, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed separately and the degree of expectation for a big hit. It includes a plurality of notice effect patterns that suggest the height of the variable display before the stop of the variable display.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the sub-side pre-determining means 371 holds the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. The effect determining means 303 includes a normal effect determining means 373 and a look-ahead effect determining means 374. The normal effect determining means 373 displays on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the information of the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery or the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the speaker. The content of the effect to be output to the 108, the decorative lamp 111, etc. is determined. The look-ahead effect determining means 374 displays on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and determines the effect content to be output to the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the like. .. The normal effect determining means 373 is determined by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232, and is selected from a plurality of variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation patterns of the special symbol transmitted from the command communication means 205. One of them is selected and read from the pattern storage means 302. The normal effect determining means 373 sends the read information of the variable effect pattern to the effect control means 304. The normal effect determining means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable effect pattern. It should be noted that the fluctuation effect pattern may be determined by the normal effect determination means 373 with reference to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the variation is combined with the content of the look-ahead effect by the look-ahead effect determination means 374. The production pattern may be determined. The look-ahead effect determining means 374 more accurately identifies the result of the present determination based on the preliminary determination result from the command communication means 205, the past preliminary determination result held on the sub-board 300, the game state information, and the like, and identifies the result. Based on the result, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect before the final determination, and the execution content. Specifically, the look-ahead effect determining means 374 determines whether the current game state is in the probability-variable game, and then shifts to the normal game state based on the pre-determination result before the pre-determination result received this time. Determine whether or not to do so. Based on the judgment result, the pass / fail result of the main judgment and the selected fluctuation pattern related to the pre-judgment result received this time are specified, and based on the specific result, whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed and the execution content of the look-ahead effect are determined. .. Since there are many parts in the effect determining means 303 in which the normal effect determining means 373 and the look-ahead effect determining means 374 cooperate with each other, the effect determining means 303 will be described as a comprehensive effect determining means 303 except for a particularly necessary part.

In each variation effect pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern of the effect image having the same variation time according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determining means 301 determines the combination and arrangement of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol 61 by the lottery determination result by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the decoration. It is decided according to the variation effect pattern of the symbol. The symbol mode determining means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of the stopped symbols to the effect control means 304. The symbol mode determining means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to for determining a stop symbol of a decorative symbol.

The stop symbol of the decorative symbol 61 is formed as a combination of three symbols, for example, when the hit / fail determination result by the first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 indicates a shift to a special game of 4R jackpot or 16R jackpot. Is selected as a specific combination, for example, a combination in which three symbols such as "777" and "111" are aligned. When the hit / fail judgment result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, a specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as "357" is selected, but the specific combination is not necessarily a combination of three symbols. It does not have to be. If the hit / fail judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, it is a combination in which the three symbols are not aligned, such as "312" and "946", and it is a specific combination selected for a 2R big hit or a small hit. The combination that does not apply is selected. If the hit / fail judgment result is not a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot, and a variation pattern indicating a loss with reach is selected, a combination such as "191" or "727" in which only one symbol is not aligned. Select.

The variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol defines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, the effect process from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation. The variable effect pattern includes a pattern for displaying a normal out-of-order symbol, a pattern for displaying an out-of-order symbol through a reach state that would be a big hit if one more symbol is aligned, and a big hit symbol after the reach state. The pattern when doing is included. In particular, the pattern when going through the reach state includes a pattern having various fluctuation times, long and short. In each variation effect pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol having the same variation time as the special symbol according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In the time saving state, when the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 is a pattern for time saving, the effect determining means 303 is a variation in which the effect content for time saving is determined. Select a production pattern. The content of the effect for shortening the time is an effect of outputting a background image or sound that impresses the player in an advantageous state due to the shortened time or probability change.

The advance notice effect pattern is an effect pattern that temporarily displays an image, animation, video, or the like of a specific character or motif on the screen, an effect pattern that operates an accessory, or an effect pattern that outputs a specific sound. The effect of the advance notice effect pattern is executed in parallel with the symbol change, and it is suggested in advance that the symbol change is expected to stop in the jackpot mode. For example, there is a normal advance notice effect in which only one image of a character is displayed on the screen, and a group advance notice effect in which a group of a large number of characters is displayed so as to pass from one end to the other end of the screen. In addition, a step-up notice effect is further included in which the display process of the notice effect is divided into a plurality of stages, the number of stages to be displayed is variable, and the higher the number of stages, the higher the expectation for the big hit.

The notice effect pattern includes a pattern (notice after reach) in which the effect is executed at a timing after the display mode of the decorative symbol 61 is in the reach state to announce the final stop mode of the symbol, and the decorative symbol 61. There is a pattern (pre-reach notice) that simultaneously announces that the effect is executed at the timing when it is not stopped and the reach state is reached.

The effect determining means 303 should determine whether or not to display the advance notice effect on the effect display device 60 according to the determination result of the winning / failing lottery or the advance determination result by a predetermined advance notice lottery, set the advance effect, and display the effect. Determine the notice production pattern. The effect determining means 303 holds a notice determination table to be referred to for determining whether or not to display the notice effect, and a notice type table to be referred to when selecting the type of the notice effect pattern. The notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to depending on the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery or the preliminary judgment result, and if the winning / failing lottery is successful, the advance notice effect is displayed with a higher probability than in the case of losing. Therefore, the correspondence between the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery and whether or not to display the notice effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to suggest a high degree of expectation for a big hit by displaying the notice effect itself.

The effect control means 304 variably displays the effect image including the decorative symbol 61 on the effect display device 60 according to the selected variable effect pattern data. The effect control means 304 sets the reception of the variation start command of the decorative symbol 61 as a start condition for the variation display of the new decorative symbol. When it is determined by the effect determining means 303 that the advance notice effect is to be displayed, the effect control means 304 displays the advance notice effect according to the selected advance notice effect pattern on the effect display device 60 in a form of superimposing it on the effect of the symbol variation. Let me.

When the winning / failing lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery is stored, the effect control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery, and whether the winning / failing lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery is stored. Regardless of whether or not, the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / failing lottery is started. As a result, when the lottery value is reserved for both the first winning / failing lottery and the second winning / failing lottery, the lottery value held in the second winning / failing lottery is preferentially read and the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. .. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning / failing lottery is not read and the change of the decorative symbol does not start until the number of holdings in the second winning / failing lottery becomes 0. In this way, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the symbol variation effect including the variation display of the decorative symbol 61.

The effect control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66. The effect control means 304 includes an effect display control means 305, a voice control means 306, and a lamp control means 309. The effect display control means 305 controls the display on the effect display device 60, and the sound control means 306 controls the sound output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111.

During the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, it is necessary to display an image indicating that the symbol is changing on the effect display device 60. Normally, a normal size decorative symbol 61 having a certain size is variablely displayed, but in a manner that hinders the visibility of the variable display of the normal size decorative symbol 61, other than the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is the main production content. You may display a special effect to be performed. In this case, the player is presented with the fact that the symbol is changing by variablely displaying an alternative symbol which is a decorative symbol having a size smaller than the normal size decorative symbol. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative symbol, it means a normal size decorative symbol, but when distinguishing it from an alternative symbol, the normal size decorative symbol is also referred to as a "normal decorative symbol".

The alternative symbol is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative symbol is impaired, for example, while the normal decorative symbol is hidden. The alternative symbol is a form of a decorative symbol for suggesting the result of a hit / fail judgment in a dramatic manner, has a simpler (in other words, simplified, simplified) display form than the normal decorative symbol, and is a normal decorative symbol. It is displayed in a simpler fluctuation process. The alternative symbol has an appearance display form corresponding to a portion indicating the symbol type of the ordinary decorative symbol, and has, for example, a display form representing a number, a character, or a symbol indicating the symbol type. Further, the alternative symbol is variablely displayed in a narrower area than the area where the decorative symbol is normally displayed in a variable manner, and is typically at a position where it is difficult to hinder the main effect by elements other than the symbol, for example, in the corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. It is displayed in a variable manner. The alternative symbol is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative symbol, but has a display form in which at least the symbol type can be visually identified. The alternative symbol may be a reduced version of the normal decorative symbol as it is, and may be the same as the normal decorative symbol except for the size.

The plurality of alternative symbols displayed in place of the plurality of normal decorative symbols suggests a high degree of expectation that the result of the winning / losing lottery will be in a state advantageous to the player depending on the combination of the stopping modes at the end of the fluctuation. For example, it is suggested that the plurality of alternative symbols have a high expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation by being in a reach state in which two symbol types out of the three alternative symbols are aligned. In addition, the left and right symbols that are in the reach state are specific types of symbols that suggest that the expectations are relatively high, such as "3" and "7", and the expectations such as "1" and "2" are high. A symbol of a type suggesting that it is relatively low may indicate a high or low degree of expectation of the reach state. It should be noted that the alternative symbol does not appear in a definite stop state in appearance, but in a temporary stop state in which minute shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the substitute symbol, the normal decorative symbol may be displayed instead of the substitute symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in the fixed stop state. Further, the decorative symbol and the alternative symbol are not displayed exclusively, but the display periods may overlap. Furthermore, at the time of a predetermined effect in which the visibility of the normal decorative symbol is impaired, the variation display of the normal decorative symbol may be continued and the variation of the alternative symbol may be displayed.

The timekeeping means 307 is a timekeeping circuit that outputs time information used for the game. The timekeeping means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from the time when the power is turned on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit having a built-in battery and capable of continuously measuring the date and time by the battery even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off or a power failure may occur may be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there is a possibility that the time of each game console may differ slightly due to individual differences or time lag, whereas in the case of a timer circuit, the time difference between multiple game consoles as long as the power is turned on at the same time. Is unlikely to occur.

The effect determining means 303 executes a synchronized effect that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the time measuring means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronized effect is an effect displayed on the effect display device 60 during the synchronized effect period, which is a period substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the symbol variation and the game state. The synchronization effect period extends for several minutes, the length of which is longer than the symbol variation time for one time, and may include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The effect pattern of the synchronized effect is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the effect pattern defines the reproduction of a predetermined music and video. A plurality of types of effect patterns for synchronized effects are prepared, and different types of effect patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as month, date, day of the week, and time.

The entrainment effect is executed regardless of whether it is during a normal game or a special game. Here, "during a normal game" includes displaying a so-called standby demo screen. That is, in "normal game", (1) "normal game during variable display" in which the symbol is variablely displayed, and (2) "normal game during variable stop" in which neither the variable display of the symbol nor the standby demo screen is displayed. , (3) "Normal game while the standby demo screen is displayed", which is the display of the standby demo screen instead of the variable display of the symbol. The tuning effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the cases of (2) and (3), the output mode for controlling the volume reduction and the brightness reduction in the tuning effect is (1). It can be different from the time of. In addition, while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player can input information about the mobile cooperation system described later by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when the operation input is received, the video and audio of the synchronized effect are output. It is suppressed, and priority is given to screen display such as production customization by the mobile cooperation system.

The tuning effect is, for example, an effect of reproducing a performance or video of a predetermined song at a predetermined time (referred to as “synchronization effect start time”). The time that triggers the reproduction of the synchronized effect may be the time that is reached with a predetermined time interval from the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or the time of every hour or half hour based on the standard time. It may be. Alternatively, a time that may vary depending on the date or day of the week may be set, and the interval may be different, such as first one hour later, then three hours later, instead of a fixed interval such as "every hour". The interval may vary depending on the date and day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be specified by the game clerk for each game store. However, it is set in advance so that the same synchronization effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of the same models installed in the same game store. For example, in the case of a specification that is triggered by a time that arrives at a predetermined time interval from the time when the power is turned on, a game store turns on a plurality of units at the same time. As a result, the same synchronization effect is simultaneously executed on the plurality of game consoles when the predetermined time is reached. As a result, the production is displayed at the same time as if multiple units are synchronized, and the same music and video are played at the same time, creating a synergistic and realistic feeling as if a live performance or movie was being screened on the spot. A directing effect can be obtained.

The synchronization effect function is also built into another game console of the same model, and multiple game consoles on the same game island are turned on at the same time by a game clerk every day. Then, the plurality of game consoles that are turned on at the same time all reach the synchronization production start time almost at the same time, and the synchronization production can be executed simultaneously at the same time. This is called a multiple-unit synchronous production. In that case, not only the video display is synchronized with multiple units, but also the sound effects and background music output are synchronized with multiple units, and the more units are synchronized, the more synergistic effect is obtained by executing the production all at once. Increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes a history of game results and a history of production results. The history of the game result is the result of the game that leads to the ball output that the player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of hit balls, the number of prize balls, the number of big hits, the number of probability changes, and the number of time reductions. The history of the production result is different from the profit in the game, and is recorded in order to obtain the profit such as the right to change the content and type of the production and the right to make it easier for a specific type of production to appear. It is information such as the score of. For example, in order to score the number of appearances of a predetermined effect, the result of a mini game, and the like and give it to the player, coded information indicating the score and the game history, for example, a two-dimensional code is displayed on the screen. When the player reads the two-dimensional code with the camera of his / her mobile terminal and decodes it, the score and game history information obtained by the decoding are stored in the player's mobile terminal. The cooperation system between the game machine and the player's mobile terminal via the two-dimensional code will be described later. The score here is necessary to expand the range of production customization described later, and the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.). It is a specification that the items that can be customized increase with the opportunity.

The effect setting means 308 stores the setting of which of a plurality of types of effect content options is selected as the effect customization based on the player's selection instruction and the game history. For example, as the effect patterns to be displayed during the special game, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different displayed motifs, characters, and songs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is allowed to select which effect to display. I will do it. Alternatively, a plurality of types of motifs or character designs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302 as the design of the design included in the decorative design that changes the design, and the player is allowed to select which of the designs is to be displayed. In such a case, when the player accepts the operation of the effect button 109 or the cross key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed and the effect pattern is selected through the operation, the effect setting means 308 selects the selected content. Remember. The effect determining means 303 selects the type of the effect pattern during the special game according to the settings stored by the effect setting means 308.

The sub-initial processing execution means 360 executes the control start processing of the sub-board 300 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off and restored. The sub-power cutoff processing executing means 362 executes an abnormality response process such as a power supply cutoff process on the sub-board 300 when a power supply abnormality such as a power failure occurs. The sub-error detecting means 364 executes the abnormality detection process on the sub-board 300. When the sub-error detecting means 364 detects the power failure, the sub-power cut processing executing means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as the power cut processing.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of a mobile cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, the player registers a user by setting an account and a password in the game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site in advance on the mobile terminal 354. When the effect button 109 is pressed by the player at the start of the game, the effect display control means 305 displays the two-dimensional code 350, which encodes the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, on the screen of the effect display device 60. The player is made to read it with the camera of the mobile terminal and access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. Character information (also called "password information") in which the player's identification information and the effect score history are encoded is transmitted from the dedicated site to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 displays the password information input screen on the effect display device 60, and causes the player to input the password information via a button operation such as a cross key 110. By decoding the input password information by the effect setting means 308 and registering it as the player's identification information and the effect score history, the player's previous game content and effect score state can be inherited. The input of the password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start the effect customization for selecting various effect elements. After that, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, as the game or the production progresses, the points given by the effect setting means 308 to the player as a benefit for the effect are added as needed and accumulated as the effect score history, and the player. Can customize the effect at any time and select and set a favorite element as various effect elements. The score for the production is basically added for each symbol change, and the higher the production type with higher expectation for transition to the special game, the higher the score is given, and the higher the score is given even when the transition to the special game is performed.

As a production customization, the player uses a part of the accumulated points, and according to the number of points to be used, the color, background, shape, character, and the color, background, shape, character, which constitute the production content displayed on the production display device 60. You can change the production elements such as music to your favorite type. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element via a button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements according to the instruction. As for the effect elements that can be customized, a plurality of types of items are prepared for each element, and different values are set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance to increase the number of customizable items is given. When the player operates a button as an instruction to end the game or the effect customization, the effect setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as a privilege on the effect and the effect score history, and controls the effect display. The means 305 displays on the effect display device 60. The player can read the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his / her own mobile terminal and decode the read two-dimensional code 352 to acquire information and store it in the mobile terminal 354. Further, the information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 354 to the game history server 358 having a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. In this way, information such as production benefits and production score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via a transmission means of displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358. The contents of the game and the production can be taken over in the next game. In addition, by continuing the game for a long time, the number of symbol fluctuations and the number of productions increase, and the score can be obtained.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291 and a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling the overall game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291 and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or data bus (not shown). The ball entry signal from each ball entry port, the payout signal from the payout control board 155, and the like are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as the winning port solenoid, the first special symbol display unit 41, and the second special symbol display unit 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). In addition, commands necessary for effect control are transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as a result of a winning / losing lottery, a result of determining a symbol, and a result of determining a variation pattern. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 by one-way communication.

The instruction data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte configuration consisting of a combination of 1-byte instruction type data, so-called MODE data, and 1-byte instruction content data, so-called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by transmitting the command type data and the command content data to the sub board 300 in association with each other. The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the instruction type, and a unique type code is assigned to each instruction type in advance at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of the instruction type data and the instruction content data is an identification bit indicating whether the instruction type data or the instruction content data is used. When the most significant bit is 1, it indicates that the instruction type data is the most significant bit. When the bit is 0, it indicates that it is instruction content data.

Since the communication from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is a specification in which 1 byte of data is transmitted for each data transmission, it is necessary to transmit 1 byte each twice in order to transmit 2 bytes of instruction data. .. In the first communication, the upper byte MODE data is transmitted, and in the second communication, the lower byte EVENT data is transmitted. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise or the like, the main board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the same data is read twice in succession by the sub board 300, the completion of transmission / reception of the data is confirmed. .. The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read two times in a row, and transmits the same data up to five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub CPU 310, a sub RAM 311, a sub ROM 312, and an effect control device 313. The sub ROM 312 is one of the data storage means for holding the sub control program including the effect pattern data in which the effect process is defined and the display pattern data in which the effect display process is defined. A sub control program including the effect pattern data, the display pattern data, and the voice pattern data is read from the sub ROM 312 into the sub RAM 311, and the effect control by the sub control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or data bus (not shown). Signals from an external device such as the effect button 109 are acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives an external device such as an effect display device 60, a speaker 108, a decorative lamp 111, and a movable accessory 66 by an effect control device 313, various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and displays and outputs the display. , Voice output, lamp lighting, and control of the production by the movement of the accessory. The sub CPU 310 transmits the display pattern data and the voice pattern data to the effect control device 313. In this embodiment, an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the effect control device 313 will be described, but the sub-board 300 and the effect control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a substrate and are separated and connected to each other. It may be formed as a separate substrate.

FIG. 12 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. The effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and a voice control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and audio data used for audio output in a data-compressed state. The effect image data is an image used for variable display or effect display as an effect object showing the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery, for example, a sprite image of a decorative pattern used for changing a decorative pattern, a sprite image used for a notice effect, and various effects. It is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data in which the motion is defined when the motion is added to the images used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The voice data is voice data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and character lines that are output during the production.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data specified in the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the effect display using the effect image data and motion data. Is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, the control CPU 320 transmits commands, effect image data, and motion data related to the effect display to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 controls the display. Similarly, commands and voice data related to voice output are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the voice control circuit 314, and voice output control is performed by the voice control circuit 314.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each of which is connected via the bus 330. For convenience, the bus 330 in this figure comprehensively shows buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

The effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and the compressed data among the data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is used as a work area when decoding the effect image data or motion data by the decoder 332, or as a work area when executing drawing processing or image processing by the drawing circuit 336. VRAM (VideoRAM) ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 in order to generate a display image, and the generated display image is used as a frame of a moving image as a frame buffer. Store in 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of video signals in the order in which they are stored. The frame buffer 338 has, for example, a memory area for two frames, and while the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image. Store in the memory area for another frame.

The data ROM 324 holds "detailed display pattern data" in which the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 is defined. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be referred to as "summary display pattern data" in which the outline of the effect display process is defined. For example, the outline display pattern data defines a rough flow of a series of effect display processes such as fluctuation start and fluctuation stop timings of decorative symbols, playback order of a plurality of moving images, and playback start and stop timings. .. On the other hand, the detailed display pattern data includes detailed display control such as the display order of sprite images for realizing variable display of decorative patterns and the display processing order for each frame for displaying moving images based on motion data. The process is defined.

When the effect control device 313 performs display control based on the "rough display pattern data" sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect control device 313 reads the "detailed display pattern data" required for the processing from the data ROM 324 and uses both display pattern data. And execute the display process. Therefore, it can be said that the effect control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display putter data including the "summary display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in the present specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the "rough display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished, and simply "display pattern data". ". For example, when the effect control means performs a specific process based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, the display pattern data includes "summary display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". .. In the modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into "summary display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data", and even if the display pattern data that serves as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324. Good.

In this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In the modification, the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, the data ROM 324, and the display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the process that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the effect control device 313 may execute a process that is executed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also function as the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. In addition, the effect control device 313 may have a hardware configuration in which the display control circuit 326 is not included. In this case, the process to be executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. May be done.

Further, in this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 includes a configuration in which the effect control device 313 is included in addition to the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 and the sub ROM 312. In the modified example, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312, and the effect control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the process that is supposed to be executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub RAM 311 may also have the function of the control RAM 322, and the sub ROM 312 may also have the function of the data ROM 324. In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the effect control device 313 is not included. In this case, the process to be executed by the effect control device 313 is executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. You may.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the main board 200 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start processing is executed by the main initial processing execution means 280, and will be described below as being executed by the main CPU 290 that functions as the main initial processing execution means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets the stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial hardware-related settings such as the setting of the internal registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

Subsequently, the power off / return process or the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed according to the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power off information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the process at the time of power off / recovery is executed. To do. In other cases, that is, even when the RAM clear switch is turned on or the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power failure information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and when the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). When the RAM clear switch is not turned on (N in S106), the main CPU 290 confirms the value of the power off information flag (S108). If the value of the power off information flag does not match the power off normal data (N in S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power off information flag matches the power off normal data (Y in S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is inspected (S110). As will be described later, if the processing is normally completed when the power is turned off last time, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291. Therefore, the main CPU 290 uses the checksum. Check the data in the main RAM 291. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), the data in the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), the process for returning to the state before the power is turned off is executed (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), the power-on normal data indicating that the power-on was normally turned on is stored in the power-off information flag, and the initial setting of various errors and the initial setting of communication with the payout control board 155 are executed. To do. Next, the untransmitted command request before the power is turned off is cleared, and the command transmission of various information indicating the game state is requested. Subsequently, an effect command corresponding to the number of pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open / closed state of the second starting port 12 and the large winning opening 20 is returned to the state before the power was cut off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared by 0, the initial setting of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed.

When the power off / returning process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to activate the interrupt process described later, and the operation of the interrupt timer is started (S118). As a result, after that, a timer interrupt is generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt process described later is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes the main process for managing the game machine (S120).

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the main process of S120 in FIG. 13 in detail. The main CPU 290 temporarily prohibits timer interruption (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors the power failure (S204). When a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected in a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), the power supply disconnection storage is executed by inputting an unconditional interruption request signal from the power supply voltage monitoring circuit to the main CPU 290. In the process, the power off confirmation data is stored in the power off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and if the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y in S206), executes the process for power-off. Therefore, proceed to S212. If the value of the power off confirmation flag does not match the power off confirmation data (N in S206), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number update process is executed (S208), the timer interrupt is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. After that, S200 to S210 are repeated. When the timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is prohibited (S202 to S208), the interrupt process described later is executed after the timer interrupt is permitted in S210.

When a power failure is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and confirms the content of the power failure information flag (S214). If the content of the power-off information flag does not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the power-on data has not been saved normally, and the power-off error data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216), proceed to S222. If the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is normally saved, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 in order to inspect the backed up data in the main RAM 291 at the next power-on (S220). Subsequently, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and a loop is performed until the power is turned off. The above-mentioned processing when the power is turned off is executed by the main power cut processing execution means 282 realized by the main CPU 290.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the details of the interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, the interrupt operation condition is set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Next, in order to manage the game machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312). , 2nd start port valid period setting process (S314), prize monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol variation start Monitoring process (S324), start port monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), large winning opening validity period setting process (S332), special symbol change start monitoring control Processing (S334), abnormality detection processing (S336), ball entry passage time abnormality detection processing (S338), game status display processing (S340), handle status signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), launch control signal Output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), effect control command transmission processing (S352), and external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356) and return.

In the input process (S304), the data of the input port of the switch mounted on the game board surface, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the door / frame opening signal, the magnetic detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the touch state signal is monitored. , Data indicating the input state is created and stored in the main RAM 291. The data indicating this input state are level data (input port data at the time of this interruption) and rising data or falling data (input port data at the time of this interruption and data at the time of the previous interruption). Data indicating a switch in which switching was observed by comparing the data of the input port with an exclusive logical sum).

In the various random number update processes (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291 and stored by incrementing the value when the value is less than the predetermined maximum value, and 0 is stored when the value is equal to or more than the predetermined maximum value. Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the subtraction result is stored when the result of subtracting the predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, and the predetermined maximum value is stored when the result is less than 0. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The value, maximum value, and initial value of each random number are read from the main RAM 291 and the value of the random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the maximum value, the random number value is set to 0. If the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the initial value is updated. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs, and when the random number value returns to the initial value, that is, the range of random numbers is cycled. Then, the initial value is newly set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table of the main RAM 291 and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the upper limit, the value of the initial random number is set to 0. The same process is executed in the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the table, and when the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the value of the timer is 0, the timer is not updated.

In the second starting port valid period setting process (S314), the valid period of the second starting port 12 is set. At the second starting port 12, the prize ball is paid out by entering the game ball and the lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the prize ball is paid out even if the game ball enters and the second special An invalid period is set in which the lottery related to the symbol is not executed. As will be described later, in the start port monitoring control process (S326), the monitoring process for winning the second start port is not executed during the invalid period of the second start port 12, so that the game ball enters the second start port 12. Even if the prize balls are paid out and the lottery related to the second special symbol is not executed. The same applies to the case where the valid period and the invalid period are set in the first starting port 11, the large winning opening 20, the first operating port 31, the second operating port 32, the general winning opening 33, and the like. When the state of the normal symbol is "normal electric accessory is in operation", data indicating that the second start port 12 is in the valid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag. If the state of the normal symbol is not "normal electric accessory is operating" and the value of the second start port effective extension timer is not 0, the second start port 12 is the valid period in the second start port valid period flag. If the value of the second start port valid extension timer is 0, the data indicating that the second start port is in the invalid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag.

In the prize monitoring process (S316), the passage of the game ball through the switch is inspected, and when the game ball passes through the switch, the switch has no invalid period or is currently in the valid period, and the prize ball is paid out. If so, update the winning counter. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of commands.

In the prize ball control process (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of the received data from the payout control board 155. Are executed in order.

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the first operation port 31 and the second operation port 32 of the game ball is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. When this is done, if the number of holdings of the normal symbol fluctuation is less than the upper limit of 4, the number of holdings of the normal symbol is updated and the random number related to the normal symbol is stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol is being controlled, the process related to the normal symbol display unit 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. When the state of the normal symbol is "normal symbol changing", the normal symbol changing processing is executed, and when "normal symbol stop symbol is being displayed", the normal symbol stop symbol display processing is executed and "normal electric" is executed. If "the accessory is in operation", the normal electric accessory operation end demo is executed, and if "the ordinary electric accessory operation end demo is in progress", the normal electric accessory operation end demo process is executed. In the normal symbol change processing, after the normal symbol is changed, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is over, the fluctuation stop setting of the normal symbol is set and the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal". Set to "Stop symbol display". In the process of displaying the normal symbol stop symbol, the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol has ended, the operation end setting of the normal symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a hit, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal electric accessory is in operation", the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the start of operation of the normal electric accessory is saved, and the operation of the normal electric accessory is started. The operation setting of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory opening extension function at the time is executed. In the case of deviation, the state of the normal symbol is set to "waiting for normal symbol change". When the winning number of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the game ball is monitored in the processing during operation of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and it is determined that the number of winnings of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has reached the maximum number of winnings. Executes the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the setting of the effective extension time of the second start port. If it is determined that the number of winnings in the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum number of winnings, the opening / closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and the ordinary electric accessory 90 is used. If it is determined that the opening / closing of the entrance of the winning opening related to the above is completed and the opening of the entrance of the normal electric accessory 90 is completed, the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the second starting port are valid. Execute the extension time setting. If it is determined that the opening / closing time of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not over, the opening / closing of the entrance of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not set. In the process during the demonstration of the end of operation of the normal electric accessory, the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and when it is determined that the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is over, the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal symbol". Set to "Waiting for fluctuation".

In the normal symbol change start monitoring process (S324), when the state of the normal symbol is monitored and "waiting for normal symbol change" and the value of the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation is other than 0, the change of the normal symbol To start. When it is determined to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation is decremented, and the hit judgment, the determination of the stop symbol, the setting of the fluctuation pattern number of the normal symbol, and the setting of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are executed. .. After that, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol changing", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for the state setting of the normal symbol, the hit determination, and the fluctuation pattern determination is cleared.

In the start port monitoring control process (S326), the first start port 11 winning and the second starting port 12 winning of the game ball are monitored. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than 4, the built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the acquired built-in random number is added. It is stored in the buffer as a random number per special symbol used in the jackpot judgment. In addition, as random numbers related to special symbols, symbol random numbers and variable pattern random numbers are acquired and stored. When the hold of the second special symbol is prioritized over the hold of the first special symbol, only the update of the hold related to the prize is executed, but when the hold order of the special symbol is the winning order, the hold is executed. In addition to updating the hold related to the winning, the total number of holdings is updated and the winning order is stored. Next, in order to request a notice effect command corresponding to the random number memorized at the start opening winning, if the state of the game machine is confirmed and it is judged that the command transmission period is reached, a hit notice effect request, a hit symbol notice effect request, a pattern notice Execute the production requests in order. Here, when (1) waiting for a hit and the random number related to the first special symbol is stored while the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is not operating, (2) waiting for a hit and the normal symbol When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored while the probability fluctuation function is not operating, or (3) when the random number related to the second special symbol is stored during the big hit or the small hit. , Judge that it is the command transmission period. Next, a production command corresponding to the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol has been updated. As described above, in the look-ahead, four pieces of the pre-judgment information (pre-hit / fail judgment information, pre-symbol judgment information, pre-pattern judgment information) and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-board 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-judgment process, but in another example, when there is a ball entering the start port, the command is uniformly transmitted and can be read ahead. The sub CPU 310 may perform various status determinations such as whether or not it is a period. Next, the value of the second starting port validity period flag is inspected, and if the value of the second starting port validity period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is the valid period, the first starting port winning prize is awarded. As in the case, the monitoring process of the second start opening winning is executed. When the value of the second starting port valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the invalid period, the monitoring process of the second starting port winning is not executed. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is once changed from 0 to 1, and then the control process related to the start of fluctuation described later is executed. ..

In the special symbol control process (S328), the hit waiting state is inspected, and when the special electric accessory is in operation, that is, during a big hit or a small hit, the special symbol control process is terminated. When the special electric accessory is not operating, the state of the special symbol is inspected, and if it is "waiting for special symbol change", the special symbol control general-purpose processing is terminated, and if it is "start of change", the special symbol change. The start process is executed, and if "special symbol is changing", the special symbol changing process is executed, and if "special symbol stop symbol is being displayed", the special symbol stop symbol displaying process is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the sub-board 300 is started to display the effect. Request commands for additional symbol information, variation pattern, and character information, set the state of the special symbol to "special symbol variation in progress", and clear the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern with 0. .. In the process during special symbol change, after changing the special symbol, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special symbol has ended, the change stop setting of the special symbol is set and the state of the special symbol is changed to "special". Set to "Stop symbol display". In the process of displaying the special symbol stop symbol, the stop symbol display time of the special symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the special symbol has ended, the operation end setting of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a big hit, in order to end the operation of the special symbol, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for change of the special symbol", the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, and the probability of the special symbol is set. Demonstration function, special symbol fluctuation time shortening function, normal symbol probability fluctuation function, normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function, and normal electric accessory opening extension function are disabled, and the state of the game machine is prepared to open the winning opening. Set in, set the hit start demo display time, execute the command request for the hit start demo effect, and the command request for the launch position specification effect. When the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the operation end judgment of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated, the command request of the game state is performed, and the special symbol is performed. In order to end the operation of, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol change", set the state of the game machine during the small hit start demo, set the hit start demo display time, and set the hit start demo effect. Executes a command request and a command request for a firing position designation effect. If the result of the hit judgment is wrong, the operation end judgment of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated, the command request of the game state is performed, and the special symbol is displayed. In order to end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol change", and the command request for the firing position designation effect is executed.

In the special electric accessory control process (S330), in order to execute the process related to the special electric accessory, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric accessory is inspected, and the condition device is operating or the special electric accessory is operating. If it is determined, the process related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating state of the special electric accessory, the processing during preparation for opening the large winning opening, the processing during operation of the special electric accessory, the processing during closing of the large winning opening, the processing during the big hit end demonstration, the processing during the small hit start demonstration, the small hit special electric Execute processing during operation, processing during closing of the small hit big winning opening, and processing during demonstration of the end of small hit.

In the large winning opening valid period setting process (S332), the result of the valid period determination of the large winning opening 20 is saved. The mouth invalid period data is stored, and if it is other than 0, the big prize opening validity period data is stored in the big winning opening validity period flag.

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a state where the variation can be started. When the digestion order of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the priority digestion of the second special symbol, (1) it is not in the big hit or the small hit, (2) the first special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, (3) ) When the second special symbol is waiting for change and (4) the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol is other than 0, the special symbol can start changing. Is determined. When the order of digestion of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the winning order, in addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol is other than 0, (6) When all of the determinations, that is, the order of digestion, that is, the order of winning, are satisfied, it is determined that the special symbol can start to change.

When it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing, the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is subtracted, and an effect command corresponding to the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Next, the hit determination of the special symbol is executed. In the hit determination, the random number per special symbol determines whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, the design is decided. In the determination of the symbol, if the hit judgment is a big hit, the big hit symbol is determined based on the special symbol hit symbol random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit symbol is determined, and if it is a miss, the miss symbol is determined. Is determined.

When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the operation content of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is determined based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the hit symbol determined in the symbol determination process, and the special symbol Set the game state after the big hit, such as the operation content of the fluctuation time shortening function and the easy winning state of the normal symbol. Next, the settings during the big hit, such as the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously and the contents of the opening time of the big winning opening, are executed. Subsequently, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the big hit based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of the normal symbol. Next, the start demo time and the end demo time are set with reference to the table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of the winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

If the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the content of the fluctuation pattern selection state is set, the start demo time and the end demo time are set by selecting the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the small hit ends, and the hit The area of the main RAM 291 used for the determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start". If the result of the hit determination is wrong, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 inspects the magnetic detection signal, the short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the opening signal of the door / frame, and the error state changes. If there is, the error state is stored, and the sub-board 300 is requested to display the error state effect of the game machine. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the error state storage and the error state effect display request are not executed.

In the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 monitors the continuous on time of each switch level in order to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality, and continuously on time ( For example, if it is determined that the value of the counter that increments for each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, the setting of the ball entry passage time error, the command transmission request, and the security output to the external information output terminal 160 Create output requests in order. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the abnormality of the ball entry transit time. If it is determined that the continuous on-time is not abnormal, the security output request is not created.

In the game state display process (S340), the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol are requested to be displayed. Create data.

In the steering wheel status signal inspection process (S342), in order to monitor the touch status of the steering wheel, the steering wheel status is inspected, and if it is determined that the steering wheel status has changed as a result of the inspection, the steering wheel status monitoring timer is subtracted and the steering wheel status is changed. Update, set the steering wheel status monitoring timer, and execute the command transmission request for steering wheel status production. If it is determined as a result of the inspection that there is no change in the handle status, the handle status monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle status monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being subtracted, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output processing (S344), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol, the display of the number of balls on hold for operation of the normal symbol, the display of the game state, and the special electric accessory are continuous. Initialize the display to display the number of times the LED is activated, the operating status of the special electric accessory when the continuous operating device is not operating, the striking display, the error display, and the prize ball ratio display. , Acquire and output display data in order.

In the launch control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of the game ball, the setting of the prohibition / permit for launching corresponding to the communication status with the payout control board 155 and the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, and After acquiring the firing prohibition / permission data, the firing prohibition / permission signal is output.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test apparatus is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output processing (S350), in order to output the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 and the large winning opening solenoid 92, the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 is acquired, and the output data of the large winning opening solenoid 92 Acquire and output data. The operation flag and operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and the output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and solenoid operation timer is acquired. Then, the solenoid operation timer is updated and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the effect control command transmission process (S352), the presence or absence of a transmission request for the command to be transmitted to the sub-board 300 is inspected, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired and the command buffer used is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, retain MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data in this order.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will be described in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include a random number per ordinary symbol and a random number per fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol as random numbers related to the ordinary symbol, and a random number per special symbol (hard random number) as a random number related to the special symbol. , There are soft random numbers per special symbol, symbol random numbers per special symbol, and variable pattern random numbers. In addition, as random numbers for giving initial values of normal symbol per random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and special symbol per soft random number, which are initial value update type random numbers, normal symbol per initial value random number and special symbol per symbol initial value There are random numbers and soft initial value random numbers per special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored at a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. The random number per normal symbol is the number of pending changes in the normal symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process that the game ball has passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. When is less than 4, which is the upper limit value, is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used for hit determination and determination of the stop symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324) to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 232, for example, is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is reserved for normal symbol fluctuation when it is determined in the interrupt processing normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. When the number is less than the upper limit value of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is used to determine the normal symbol fluctuation pattern when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324) that the normal symbol fluctuation is to be started.

The random number per special symbol is obtained when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process. , The values of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol are acquired, and both are added to generate the value, which is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The random number per special symbol is used to execute the big hit determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored at a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. The soft random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). It is obtained from the predetermined position of, and is used to generate a random number per special symbol as described above.

The symbol random number per special symbol takes a value of 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 6), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is set at a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. It is stored. The symbol random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). Is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The special symbol per symbol random number is used to determine the jackpot symbol when the hit determination is a jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is determined by the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). Obtained from the position and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

The initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are the same range as the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, respectively. It is updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The initial value random number per ordinary symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are the random number per ordinary symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the special random number per initial value update type random number update process (S308). It is used as the initial value of each random number when updating the soft random number per symbol.

Since the interrupt process is executed at regular time intervals by timer interrupt, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update processes (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular time intervals. To. That is, the normal symbol per random number, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol per random number, the special symbol per soft random number, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, in the main process (S120), the time from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer. Repeated for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process differs depending on the game state and the like, the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) includes various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308). ), It is not executed at regular intervals. As a result, the initial value random number acquired when the initial value is set in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random each time.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the sub-board 300 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start processing is executed by the sub-initial processing execution means 360, and will be described below as being executed by the sub CPU 310 that functions as the sub-initial processing execution means 360. When the control of the sub-board 300 is started, the sub CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and sets registers and initializes ports of the sub CPU 310. Perform the initial settings related to the hardware (S504). The control program is read from the sub ROM 312 and placed in the sub RAM 311. Of the various variables in the control program, the initial value is set for the variable having the initial value, and the zero clear data is set for the variable without the initial value. As a result, the sub-RAM 311 is initialized (S506). The interrupt process on the sub-board 300 includes a process when the power is turned on and a reset process when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is enabled, as interrupt processes that are executed with the highest priority. Next, as an interrupt process of priority level 7 having a high execution priority, there is a command process received from the main board 200, and as an interrupt process of priority level 3 having the next highest priority, CPU runaway detection by the watchdog timer. There is a time reset process. The next priority interrupt process for priority level 2 includes processing related to commands sent and received to and from the control CPU 320, and the lowest priority level 1 interrupt process is communication processing with the real-time clock. There are various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If interrupts related to the above various processes occur at the same time, the interrupts set in advance for each interrupt type are executed with priority. The processes shown in this figure include the highest priority level interrupt, the process at power startup, the reset process when various abnormalities occur, and the priority level 3 interrupt, the reset process when CPU runaway is detected. Including.

Interrupts (priority level 7) other than commands received from the main board 200 are prohibited (S510), and various error information used in the model is set from all the error information stored in advance for all models (S512). .. All the lamps such as the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the operation of the watchdog timer is started (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the main process of S518 does not return to the main flow, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S518 in FIG. In order to check in the main process of this figure whether the control program arranged in the sub RAM 311 is correctly arranged in S506 of FIG. 16, the start address for starting the check is acquired (S530), and in the subsequent processes. All interrupts are allowed (S532), and device initialization operations such as motors and solenoids are executed (S534).

If the setting is to use the watchdog timer, clear the watchdog timer (S536), update the counter of the decorative symbol so that the combination of the decorative symbols is a random combination (S540), and input the input port of the sub CPU 310. Is monitored (S542). Since S540 is a process in a method of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol using a counter, in the case of a method of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol using a lottery sheet incorporating all the symbol combinations that are the out-of-order symbols Does not execute the processing of S540. The process of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a stop symbol of the special symbol is received from the main board 200 as described later in S552. The sub CPU 310, which functions as the sub-error detecting means 364, monitors the error state, notifies the error when various errors are detected (S544), and executes a process according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546). The advance notice lottery is executed (S548). In the advance notice lottery in S548, since the command of the advance notice effect to appear immediately after the start of the symbol change is transmitted to the effect control device 313 as soon as possible, the lottery process is not processed in one loop but a plurality of times. It is divided into loops, and the notice effect that appears immediately after the start of the symbol change is drawn in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, lamp, motor, or solenoid, that operation is executed (S550), the command saved in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if immediately after the command analysis, the process proceeds to S536. Return (Y in S554), if not immediately after command analysis (N in S554), update the lottery software random number as a low-priority process that can be performed in free time (S556), and return to the process in S536. In S552, when the command to be analyzed shows the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol is determined by the process of S552, and when the command to be analyzed indicates the stop symbol of the special symbol, the lottery sheet is displayed. If it is a method of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol by using it, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined by the process of S552.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is a priority level 7 interrupt command having the highest priority next to the reset interrupt and error interrupt. The data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in a row, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y in S600), and the confirmed command is the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y in S602), the first command is saved in the temporary storage area (S604). The hard random number is acquired for the subsequent processing (S606), and the original routine is returned. By acquiring the hard random number each time the main command is interrupted from the main board 200 in this way, the randomness of the value is enhanced without causing periodicity in the acquisition timing of the random number. If the data read in S600 does not match twice in a row (up to 5 times can be read), S602 is skipped and the original routine is returned (N in S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N in S602), and if it can be confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command buffer (command data). The command write pointer, which is the read position in the ring buffer), is acquired (S610), and the first command and the second command are saved in the command buffer (S612). The command data stored in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command light pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned. If the first command has not been received in S608, skip S610 and later (N in S608) and return to the original routine.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command related to the effect display from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and is generated in a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y in S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data is transmitted to the control CPU 320 up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives a command indicating that the command data has been normally received on the control CPU 320 side from the control CPU 320. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628), and the original routine is returned. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N in S622), S624 and subsequent steps are skipped and the original routine is returned.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command received by the sub CPU 310 from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been normally received. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), saved in the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is for controlling a lamp such as a decorative lamp 111, controlling a solenoid or a motor for driving a movable accessory 66, and managing and controlling various timers, and is generated at a cycle of 1 ms. Since the interrupt is the lowest priority level 1, the interrupt of the priority level 2 or higher is permitted (S640), and the signal indicating the input from the effect button 109, the signal indicating the error detection, and the signal indicating the power failure , Processes the input / output of ports that input / output drive signals to controlled devices such as motors and solenoids (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating a power failure is input, the backup process is immediately started. A timer is used to update the data related to device control (S644), such as counting processing based on the control pattern of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on / off control of the buffer for writing data to the port in S642. Update (S646), update the timer for managing the input valid time of the effect button 109 (S648), and update the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 and runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. To create a 16 ms cycle (S650).

The minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of the image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integral multiple thereof as the minimum unit of the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, it is possible to easily synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Further, when counting a relatively long period such as an error notification for 30 seconds, if a count with a 10 interrupt (1 ms) cycle is used, the count value becomes longer than necessary, but 16 ms. The count value can be shortened by using the count value of the cycle.

The task control includes 16 types of tasks from processes 0 to 15, one of which is the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, and two tasks are the runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is executed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter to realize switching in a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processes 0 and 8, and when the count values of the task control counters are 0 and 8, that is, once every 80 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652). By doing so, monitoring is realized in a cycle of 8 ms.

It should be noted that the control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that is on / off inverted for each frame, and if this toggle signal does not change continuously at the same value for 1600 ms, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and the sub CPU 310 Sends a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and the control CPU 320 that receives the reset signal executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 in a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), it is monitored in a cycle of 8 ms shorter than that cycle. Finally, the timer that manages the relatively long error notification period such as the error notification for 30 seconds as described above is subtracted (S654), and the error notification ends at the time-out.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the special symbol variation. When the second winning / failing lottery value is held (Y in S700), the second winning / failing determination means 222 reads the second winning / failing lottery value and determines whether or not the second special symbol 52 is correct (S702), and the second winning / failing is determined. The determination means 222 determines the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determining means 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and issues a variation start command together with the determined result. It is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to start the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

When the second winning / failing lottery value is not held (N in S700) and the first winning / failing lottery value is held (Y in S708), the first winning / failing determination means 221 is the first winning / losing lottery. The value is read out and the hit / fail of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first hit / miss determination means 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determining means 231 is the first. 1 The variation pattern of the special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and the variation start command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 together with the determined result to start the symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first winning / failing lottery value is not held, the processes from S710 to S722 are skipped (N in S708).

Processes the symbol variation display of the special symbol (S718), repeats S718 until the predetermined variation time elapses and reaches the symbol display stop timing (N of S720), and stops the symbol display after the predetermined variation time elapses. When the timing is reached (Y of S720), the fluctuation stop command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to stop the symbol fluctuation being displayed at the predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is finished. To do.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying decorative symbol variation. The effect determining means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the variation start and the effect display content from the main substrate 200 (S750), and stops the decorative symbol according to the received special symbol stop symbol, variation pattern, and hit / fail determination result. The mode is determined (S752), and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, when the precursor setting is turned on by the preliminary determination (Y in S756), the already determined variable effect pattern includes a specific effect content that should be avoided from being superimposed on the advance notice effect. If it is not (N of S758) and it is not a symbol change that is the trigger for turning on the precursor setting (N of S760), the setting for displaying the predetermined advance notice effect is executed (S764), and the precursor setting is set. If it is a symbol change that is an on-trigger (Y in S760), the precursor setting is turned off (S762). If the precursor setting is not on (N in S756), or if the variable effect pattern includes a specific effect content (Y in S758), the processes of S760 to S764 are skipped.

After that, the variation effect display of the decorative symbol is started (S766), the variation effect display process of the decorative symbol and (S768) are executed, the notice effect display process is executed (S770), and the variation stop command is received from the main board 200. When S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772) and the fluctuation stop command is received (Y in S772), the symbol variation display is stopped by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774). ), The variation effect of the decorative pattern is completed (S776).

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the effect process of the special game (S800), and the open / close control means 275 opens the grand prize opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not passed (N of S804) and the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the game returns to S804 (N of S806), and the predetermined opening time has passed (N of S806). Although the opening time has not passed (Y of S804) (N of S804), when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 reaches 9 or more (Y of S806), the opening / closing control means 275 is the large winning opening. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), 1 is added to the number of rounds to return to S802 (S812), and if the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the effect display is displayed. The control means 305 ends the effect processing of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 ends the special game (S816), and starts the execution of the specific game, that is, the probability change, the time saving, and the easy ball entry state (S818). ).

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the process of the small hit game. In the small hit game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the large winning opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time elapses (N of S822). When the time has passed (Y of S822), the large winning opening 20 is closed (S824), and if the opening and closing of the set number of times has not been completed (N of S826), 1 is added to the number of opening and closing to return to S820. (S828) If the opening and closing for the set number of times is completed (Y in S826), the small hit game is ended.

In the prerequisite technique, the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the number of big hits in the first game, that is, the second game has one big hit than the first game. In another example, the first game may be designed to have a higher expected value for winning a prize ball than the second game, although it was designed to have a higher expected value for winning a prize ball in. However, it may be designed so that the expected value of winning the prize ball in the first game and the second game is substantially equal. In the latter case, it may be designed so that the average number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game is equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which a unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 100% is executed, and in a second game, a special game in which a unit game is executed four times with a probability of 50% is executed. However, there may be a special game in which the unit game is executed 16 times with a probability of 50%. Further, in any case, when a specific area is provided in the large winning opening and the game ball that has entered the large winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the special game is completed. It may be configured so that a specific game such as a probabilistic state is performed. In this case, the special game executed when the big hit is made in the second game is easier to enter the specific area than the special game which is executed when the big hit is made in the first game. It may be configured so that the probability that the normal game in the probabilistic state is executed is high after the end of the special game. For example, the first hit in which a special game in which it is relatively difficult to enter a specific area is executed, and the second hit in which a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area is executed. It may be provided so that the second game has a higher probability of being a second hit than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of a second hit in the first game may be less than 100%, but the probability of a second hit in the second game may be configured to be 100%.

(First Example)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration based on the above-mentioned prerequisite technology. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite technology will be mainly described, and the common points will be omitted. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the prerequisite technology will be described with the same reference numerals.

Further, in the following description, the process of displaying the effect image on the effect display device 60 will be described as the operation of the effect determination means 303, but as described above, the effect determination means actually realized by the sub CPU 310. The effect 303 (sub-main) transmits a command related to the effect image to be displayed to the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) realized by the control CPU 320, and the effect control means 304 controls the display control circuit 326 to control the effect image. Is displayed on the effect display device 60. Therefore, the operation described mainly by the effect determining means 303 in the following description may be expressed mainly by the effect control means 304 or the display control circuit 346. In the following description, the configuration for displaying an image can be appropriately replaced with a configuration for outputting the information indicated by the image by voice.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, like the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the prerequisite technology, includes a plurality of starting winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, a plurality of holding lamps, and one large winning opening. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, like the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the prerequisite technology, changes the second special symbol 52 (hereinafter, also referred to as “special symbol 2”) with respect to the first special symbol 51 (hereinafter, also referred to as “special symbol 2”). Priority is given to the fluctuation of "Special Figure 1") (Special Figure 2 priority digestion). On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment is different from the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the prerequisite technology in that it has a function of a small hit V.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery is executed, and the determination result of the lottery is determined. When it becomes a big hit, a special game in which the big winning opening 20 repeatedly opens is started. On the other hand, when the determination result of the first winning or losing lottery or the second winning or losing lottery is a predetermined result called a small hit, a small hit game in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time is executed. This small hit game is distinguished from a big hit because it has only one unit game that is repeated a plurality of times in the case of a big hit.

When a small hit game is being executed, when the game ball that has entered the big winning opening enters a specific area called the V zone in the big winning opening, the special electric accessory is continuously operated to execute the big hit game. A special game is executed in which the condition device for operating the continuous operation device of the accessory is activated, the ball is promoted from a small hit to a big hit, and the big winning opening is opened for a long time. So-called small hit V is generated. That is, in the special game control means 260, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit, or the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game is a specific area inside the large winning opening 20. A special game is executed when passing through. Therefore, the small hit game in the first embodiment has substantially the same operation as the conventional type 2 pachinko game. The difference between the model that adopts the small hit V and the second type pachinko game is that in the small hit V, the stop display mode of the special symbol that triggered the execution of the small hit game (so-called one type of hit type) The point is that the condition device (continuous operation device for the accessory) that operates when the ball enters a specific area can be made different, and the profit obtained by one V winning can be changed.

When the special game is completed, the game shifts to a specific game called a variable time shortening game (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction") with a predetermined probability (100% in the first embodiment). The time reduction is continued until a new big hit occurs or the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number after the end of the special game. The time reduction of the first embodiment is a state in which the ease of entering the ball into the second starting winning opening is higher than that of the normal state, and corresponds to the easy-to-enter state in the prerequisite technique, and is also called an electric chew support. The time reduction includes (1) shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol, (2) probabilistic change of the normal symbol, (3) shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and (4) extending the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 90. The ordinary electric accessory 90 is an entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12 changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.

Further, as will be described later, in the winning / failing lottery triggered by entering the second starting port 12, the probability of being judged as a small hit is set high. Therefore, a small hit is likely to occur during a short time when the ease of entering the second starting port 12 is increased, and the possibility of a small hit V is also increased. It should be noted that the big hit compared with the small hit V, and the big hit in which the special game is started when the symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the manner indicating the big hit is also referred to as a "design big hit" below. In a normal game in a normal state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to enter the ball into the second starting port 12 except for the situation of chance production (first hit of the normal symbol) described later, so first enter the first starting port 11. Make a ball, get the symbol jackpot of special figure 1, and shift to a shorter time. Then, in a short time, the ball is entered into the second starting port 12 to obtain a small hit V or a symbol big hit, and the time reduction continues even after the end of the special game, so that the small hit V and the symbol big hit are continuously aimed at. It becomes.

FIG. 26 shows the main game flow of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. As described above, in the normal state (during the normal game in the normal state), the ball is entered into the first starting port 11 to aim at obtaining the symbol jackpot according to the special figure 1. The symbol jackpot of the special figure 1 is a so-called first hit, and includes a 15R jackpot to which 9 time reductions are given, a 4R jackpot to which 9 time reductions are given, and a 4R jackpot to which 1 time reduction is given. One of these plurality of types of jackpots is assigned based on the type of jackpot symbol.

When the time saving 9 times is given, the game shifts to the normal game in the time saving state after the special game is completed, and the time saving state is the case where a big hit (including both the symbol big hit and the small hit V) occurs, or the normal game. It means that it ends when the variation of the special figure 2 in FIG. 2 is executed 9 times. In addition, when one time reduction is given, the game shifts to the normal game in the time reduction state after the end of the special game, and when a big hit occurs in the time reduction state, or the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the normal game is executed once. It means to end when it is done. It should be noted that the time saving end condition described here is described on the assumption that a preferable game is performed in order to obtain a ball in the design of the game machine, and the detailed end condition will be described later.

In the case of a big hit in which 9 times of time reduction is given, after the special game is completed, the game is shifted to the normal game in the time reduction state, and while the change of special figure 2 is executed 9 times and the symbol change of 4 pending pieces remaining at the end of the change. The rush effect is displayed while (typically four fluctuations in Special Figure 2) is executed. In addition, in the case of a big hit in which one time reduction is given, after the end of the special game, the game is shifted to the normal game in the time reduction state, and while the fluctuation of Special Figure 2 is executed once and for the four holdings existing at the end of the special game. The chance effect is displayed while the symbol variation (typically four variation of special figure 2) is executed. If no big hit occurs due to the symbol change during the time reduction and the symbol change for 4 pending items, it returns to the normal time.

In the case of symbol fluctuations during the time reduction or four symbol fluctuations after the time reduction ends, the small hit V (special figure 2 small hit V) and special figure triggered by the change result of special figure 2 becoming a small hit. 2 symbol jackpots or special symbol 1 symbol jackpots can occur. Special Figure 2 Small hit V is divided into 15R big hit, which is given 9 times of time saving, 10R big hit, which is given 9 times of time saving, and 5R big hit, which is given 9 times of time saving. The special figure 2 symbol jackpot is a 5R jackpot that is given 9 times in a short time. The special figure 1 symbol jackpot is divided into either a 15R jackpot that is given 9 times of working hours and a 4R jackpot that is given 9 times of working hours. When these big hits are finished, the game returns to the normal game (rush effect) in the time saving state, and the aim is to acquire the big hit again by the symbol change during the time saving or the symbol change four times after the time saving.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment can open the normal electric accessory 90 for a long time in the normal game in the normal state when the normal symbol hits. Then, the chance effect (normal electric opening effect) is displayed even during the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and during the symbol change of the special figure 2 held during that period. In the variable effect related to the special figure 2 hold that occurred during the normal game in the normal state, since it is a big chance to acquire the small hit V, the special effect that looks different from the variable effect of special figure 1 executed in the same state. Is to execute. Even during the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 2 hold, the special figure 2 small hit V, the special figure 2 symbol big hit, or the special figure 1 symbol big hit may occur.

FIG. 27 shows the basic structure of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment on the front side. The first starting port 11 is the lower center of the game area 81, and is provided at a lower position of the center decoration 64. The first operating port 31 is provided at an upper position of the first starting port 11. The first starting port 11 and the first operating port 31 allow a game ball launched with a first strength (relatively weak strength in the first embodiment, in other words, left-handed) to enter or easily enter. It is provided at the position. On the other hand, the second starting port 12, the large winning opening 20, and the second operating port 32 are launched at a strength different from the first strength (relatively strong strength in the first embodiment, in other words, right-handed). It is provided at a position where the ball can enter or is easily entered. In the first embodiment, the left-handed game ball is prevented from entering the second starting port 12, the large winning opening 20, and the second operating port 32, and the right-handed game ball is referred to as the first starting port 11. A game nail or a windmill is arranged in the game area 81 so as not to enter the first operating port 31, and a flow path of the game ball is set.

Inside the large winning opening 20, a specific area is provided in which a small hit development big hit is generated by the passage of the game ball, and the specific area passage detection device 504 is used when the game ball passes through the specific area. Detect that. The specific area opening / closing solenoid 506 controls a switching member that switches the state of the specific area between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass and an open state in which the game ball can pass. The specific area opening / closing solenoid 506 controls the switching member so as to open the specific area when the result of the winning / failing lottery (which can be said to be the result of the winning / failing determination) is a small hit according to the control of the opening / closing control means 275. When a ball entering a specific area is detected, it is decided to shift to a special game. If the ball entering the specific area is not detected, the game returns to the normal game after the small hit game is completed.

The special game according to the first embodiment includes a first special game (symbol big hit) executed when the symbol at the time of stopping becomes a big hit, and a small hit after the symbol at the time of stopping becomes a small hit. There is a second special game (small hit V) that is executed when it develops into a big hit. The first special game is the same as the special game shown in the prerequisite technique, that is, triggered by a symbol jackpot. The second special game is a special game that accompanies the operation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, triggered by the fact that the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game (also referred to as "V winning"). Is.

A status display lamp 502 for indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 500 is provided at the lower right position on the outside of the gaming area 81. The state display lamp 502 is composed of, for example, two lamps, and the first lamp indicates whether or not the time saving state (in this embodiment, usually accompanied by the easy entry state of the electric accessory), and the second lamp indicates. The lamp indicates whether or not the game is in a game state in which a right-handed hit should be made (a state in which a normal electric accessory is easy to enter or a state in which a special electric accessory is operating). The first lamp is turned on when the normal game is in the time saving state, and is turned off when the normal game is in the normal state. The second lamp is turned on in the game state in which the player should hit right, that is, in the time saving state, the small hit game state, or the special game state, and is turned off in the normal state. Therefore, the second lamp of the status display lamp 502 functions as a so-called right-handed indicator lamp, and indicates whether or not the game state is such that right-handed strike should be performed in a certain display mode.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the probability of the symbol jackpot of special figure 1 and the probability of the symbol jackpot of special figure 2 are both 1/319. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the probability of a symbol jackpot does not change and is always constant. Further, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, and the small hit probability of the special figure 2 is 1/10. As a modification, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 may be larger than 0 (for example, 1/500), but is set to a value smaller than at least the small hit probability of the special figure 2.

Further, in the small hit game, the opening / closing control means 275 opens the large winning opening 20 for a predetermined time (for example, 1.6 seconds) of 1.8 seconds or less, and during that time, the specific area inside the large winning opening 20 is also open. Control to be. The large winning opening 20 preferably adopts a slide type attacker type (a type in which a game ball can roll on the lid member of the large winning opening and can enter the ball when the lid member is opened), and further, the large winning opening The flow path on the upper part of the 20 or in the vicinity of the large winning opening 20 is configured such that a plurality of game balls stay in the vicinity of the entrance (lid, etc.) of the large winning opening 20, for example, in a zigzag shape. Furthermore, the opening pattern of the large winning opening 20 is such that the opening of 0.124 seconds is repeated 13 times with a predetermined closing time in between, and even if the player's launch is delayed, the game ball is inserted. It is preferable to design it so that it can be used. As a result, when the large winning opening 20 is opened for a short time in the small hit game, it is possible to generate a ball entering the large winning opening 20 and a small hit V with a high probability. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment is configured so that if a small hit occurs, a substantially small hit V can be obtained.

FIG. 28 shows the breakdown of the jackpots in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. The symbol jackpot of the special figure 1 includes a 15R jackpot of 9 time reductions, a 4R jackpot of 9 time reductions, and a 4R jackpot of 1 time reduction, and the distribution probabilities are 1%, 49%, and 50%. It should be noted that the 4R jackpot with one time reduction during the time reduction has the same control as the 4R jackpot with nine time reductions. Therefore, in the big hit during the time reduction, all the time reduction 9 times are given. The symbol jackpot in Special Figure 2 is a 5R jackpot with 9 time reductions. The small hit V of the special figure 2 includes a 15R big hit of 9 times of time reduction, a 10R big hit of 9 times of time reduction, and a 5R big hit of 9 times of time reduction, and the distribution probabilities are 60%, 10%, and 30%. In this embodiment, the maximum number of time reductions is set to 9, but the lottery with a small hit probability of 1/10 can be performed 9 times, and the large hit probability based on the small hit or the symbol big hit during the time reduction is Although it is set to about 61%, as a premier hit, a small hit V and a symbol big hit that will be a time saving of 100 are provided to virtually guarantee the next continuation (with a probability of about 99.9%, the next small hit during the time saving). It may have a gaming state that gives the player a sense of security that he / she can win, including the case where a hit and a big hit of a symbol can be obtained).

1. 1. Composition related to time saving and open lottery (ordinary design lottery):
There are three types of open lottery results: missed, first hit, and second hit. The first hit is a hit that accompanies the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 for a long time, and the winning probability in the normal state is about 1/590 (special symbol variation conversion). The second hit is a hit accompanied by the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 for a short time, and the winning probability in the normal state is about 3/590. In the time saving state, the winning probability of the first hit is about 10/11, and the winning probability of the second hit is 0.

In the normal game in the normal state, the open / close control means 275 has a plurality of game balls when the open lottery is the first hit (winning probability 1/590) and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the first hit. The normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a predetermined time (hereinafter, also referred to as "long opening time"), which is set to be equal to or longer than the time interval in which the ball is fired. The normal electric accessory 90 is controlled to be in the open state so as to be. Here, the time interval (the shortest time interval) in which the two game balls are continuously fired may be 0.6 seconds to 0.8 seconds. The long opening time is less than 6 seconds, and is a value equal to or greater than the time interval in which the upper limit of the number of reserved game balls (4 in the first embodiment) of the special figure 2 (second winning / failing lottery value) is launched. You may. Further, the long opening time may be a value equal to or longer than the time expected to be required from the start of launching the game ball to the increase of the special figure 2 hold from 0 to 4. The long opening time in the first embodiment is 5.9 seconds.

The opening / closing control means 275 is the above-mentioned length even when the open lottery is the first hit (the winning probability is 10/11) and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode indicating the first hit in the normal game in the time saving state. During the opening time, the normal electric accessory 90 is opened. The long opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the normal state and the long opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in the short time state may be different, but in each time, a plurality of (preferably 4) games are played. Set to a value greater than or equal to the time interval at which the ball is fired. In this way, by opening the normal electric accessory 90 for a long time with the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state, it is possible to provide the player with a chance to accumulate a plurality of special figure 2 holds even in the normal state. That is, it is possible to provide the player with a chance to acquire a small hit V multiple times. For example, in the game flow of FIG. 26, it is possible to provide a route that shifts to a continuous villa state from a normal time through a hit of a normal symbol.

When the result of the open lottery is the second hit, the opening time (“short opening time”) of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is shorter than the long opening time, and the maximum number of balls entering the second starting port 12 is It may be set to the time when one or two can be used. Further, the short opening time may be set to a time when it is practically difficult to enter the ball into the second starting port 12.

The operation termination condition of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is that the ordinary electric accessory 90 is opened for a predetermined time, or the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 is the special figure 2 (here, the second winning / failing lottery value). It means that the upper limit of the number of reserved pieces (4 pieces in the first embodiment) has been reached. The opening / closing control means 275 (1) reaches a long opening time (in the case of the first hit) or a short opening time (in the case of the second hit) after controlling the ordinary electric accessory 90 to the open state. When at least one of the above and (2) the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 has reached four is satisfied, the normal electric accessory 90 is controlled to the closed state. In other words, the state of the normal electric accessory 90 is switched so that the ball cannot enter the second starting port 12 (difficult as a modification).

The long opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 in a normal game that does not go through a big hit (time reduction) is an exceptional game flow (probability 1/590). By the above operation end condition, it is possible to suppress excessive occurrence of small hit V in a normal game that does not go through the big hit (time reduction), which is an exceptional game flow, and it becomes easy to stabilize the ball output rate within the design range. .. In addition, it prevents the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 from exceeding the assumed value of 4 times when the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a long time in the normal state, and the ball ejection rate is based on the assumption of 4 fluctuations in Special Figure 2. Will be easier to achieve.

The conditions for ending the time reduction are (1) that a big hit or a small hit has occurred, and (2) the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is 9 times (when 9 times of time reduction is given) or 1 time (when 1 time reduction is given). It has been reached, (3) the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 has reached 7 times, and (4) the total number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 15 times (when the time reduction is 9 times) or 7 times. It is satisfied when any of the things that have been reached (in the case of granting once in a short time) are established. The specific game control means 270 shifts the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to the time reduction, and counts the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 during the time reduction individually. When the above-mentioned end condition is satisfied, the specific game control means 270 ends the time reduction. When any of the above (2), (3) and (4) is satisfied, the specific game control means 270 returns the game state of the normal game to the normal state.

In this way, by setting each of the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 as the end condition of the time reduction, the value of one time reduction can be guaranteed. That is, by the time the fluctuation of the special figure 1 reaches 7 times, the ball can be expected to enter the long-opened second starting port 12, and if the ball enters the second starting port 12, the special figure 1 Special figure 2 fluctuates with priority, and a small hit (and a small hit V) can be obtained with a high probability. The number of fluctuations of special figure 1 under the time saving end condition is 7 times, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved pieces (4 pieces) of special figure 1 that may exist at the end of the special game, and the first start that may occur when the player accidentally hits the left. It is the total of insurance (3 pieces) for entering the ball into the mouth 11.

As will be described later, since the fluctuation of the special figure 1 during the time reduction is only the ultra-shortening fluctuation, the number of insurances is increased in the first embodiment. As a modification, if the fluctuation of the special figure 1 during the time reduction is longer, the number of insurances may be smaller (for example, one).

When the time saving end condition is satisfied due to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the specific game control means 270 is displayed at the time of the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 in the change (in other words, at the end of the fluctuation time). End the time reduction and return the game state to the normal state.

Here, the open lottery (in other words, the normal symbol lottery) is continuous for one symbol fluctuation time (that is, one fluctuation time of the special figure 2) triggered by entering the ball into the second starting port 12 in a short time. It is set to a value equal to or longer than the time during which the hit of a normal symbol can occur at least twice or more when executed. In other words, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 selects, as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 during the time reduction, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is defined to be at least the time during which the hit of the normal symbol can occur twice or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern table is configured so that, as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 during the time reduction, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is defined is at least the time during which the normal symbol can be hit twice or more. May be good.

As described in the prerequisite technique, for example, one fluctuation time of a normal symbol in a short time may be 2 seconds. In this case, the time during which the normal symbol can be hit twice or more is about 10 seconds (two fluctuation times of the normal symbol + one operation time of the normal electric accessory). In the first embodiment, the one-time fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the time saving is set to a predetermined time of 10 seconds or more. As a modification, the one-time fluctuation time of the special figure 2 may be set to a time longer than the long opening time (5.9 seconds in the first embodiment) when the normal symbol is the first hit.

Here, in the case of the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal time, the special figure 2 fluctuates up to four times. This is because when the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 reaches the upper limit value (4 pieces) of the number of reserved balls shown in FIG. 2, the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 is completed. On the other hand, in the normal game after the end of the time reduction 1 time 4R jackpot, the special figure 2 fluctuates up to 5 times between the time reduction 1 time and the time reduction 4 times. The ordinary electric accessory 90 opened by the first hit of the ordinary symbol in a short time is temporarily closed when the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 reaches the upper limit of the number of reserved balls (4) in the special figure 2. .. However, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is equal to or longer than the time during which the normal symbol can be hit twice or more, the first hit of the normal symbol is generated for the second time and the normal electric accessory 90 is released. This is because it is possible to further enter the ball into the 2 starting port 12 (typically, the special figure 2 hold is increased by 1).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the chance of passing through the big hit given once in a short time is more advantageous to the player than the chance based on the normal symbol hit in the normal time. Even if the time reduction is the minimum once, by increasing the possibility of acquiring a small hit V than when hitting a normal symbol in normal times, it is possible to raise the awareness of the player who is trying to acquire a big hit. , Can reward the player who won the jackpot.

In the first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252, when the time reduction ends at the time of the stop display of the special symbol change in which the winning / failing lottery result is out of order, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is set in advance. Increase the fixed time for special symbols when displaying a fixed display for a fixed time. In other words, the next symbol change based on the held winning / failing lottery value (typically the second winning / failing lottery value) is not started from the end of the time reduction until a specially long set special figure fixed time elapses. The first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 determine whether or not the special symbol has a fixed display timing. (1) The specific game control means 270 has completed the time reduction (big hit symbol, small). Judgment is made by detecting (except when the time reduction ends due to the stop of the winning symbol). As a modification, (2) the determination may be made by counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (special figure 2) in the time saving. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the time saving end conditions are independently set for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 variation may be executed at normal times. Therefore, the method (1) is used. More suitable.

When the result of the winning / failing lottery in the first embodiment is wrong, the fixed time of the special figure at the end of the time reduction is 6 seconds. Therefore, even if the normal symbol hits immediately before the end of the time reduction, the opening (5.9 seconds) of the normal electric accessory 90 ends before the lapse of the special figure fixed time. As a result, the number of special figure 2 hold increases more than expected (as a situation, if there is no special figure fixed time of 6 seconds, when the fluctuation of special figure 2 starts during the operation of the normal electric accessory, special figure 2 Since one free space is created for the hold, it is possible to suppress the unintended fifth variation of special figure 2 after the end of the time reduction), that is, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the small hit V beyond the design range. ..

The production determination means 303 executes the advance notice lottery when the result of the open lottery is out of order or the second hit, and the first hit occurs according to the result of the advance notice lottery and is in a chance state (the head of the ordinary electric accessory 90). Display a notice effect (also referred to as "Gase notice effect") that is expected to enter (open). For example, the effect determining means 303 may display the Gase notice effect with a predetermined probability when the result of the open lottery is off or the second hit. In the first embodiment, the above-mentioned Gase notice effect is not displayed based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special figure.

When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the first hit (long open) during the change of the special figure 1 in the normal game in the normal state, the effect determining means 303 is the effect corresponding to the change of the special figure 1. The general electric opening effect (corresponding to the hold charge effect described later) is displayed in an manner corresponding to the execution state of the decorative symbol 61 (variation effect, etc.). The Fuden opening effect includes a notice effect (hereinafter, also referred to as "rush effect") that suggests the entry into a chance state. In addition, the Fuden opening effect includes a notice effect (hereinafter, also referred to as "right-handed navigation") that encourages right-handed strikes. The right-handed navigation may be a content that encourages the player to launch a game ball aiming at entering the second starting port 12, or may be a content that prompts the player to save the hold of FIG. Here, if the normal electric accessory is activated immediately after the stop display of the normal symbol, there is a risk that the player will not be able to sufficiently hold the hold even if he / she starts right-handed by looking at the "right-handed navigation". , Set a longer time such as the normal symbol fixed time and the normal electric accessory operation start demonstration time until the normal electric accessory is opened after the stop display, and use that time to "right-handed navigation" It is preferable to produce a production. In addition, it is said that the execution start timing of the normal electric opening effect is stopped and displayed in a manner in which the normal symbol indicates the first hit, but if right-handed is not executed, the normal electric accessory (special figure 2 starting port) is displayed. On the other hand, since it becomes difficult to insert the game ball, it may be possible to execute the game from a predetermined timing before the stop display (for example, the remaining 5 seconds of the normal symbol fluctuation time when the normal symbol is the first hit). At the timing of, the normal symbol winning effect, which is a success pattern, is executed for the above-mentioned Gase notice effect, and the right-handed guidance effect is performed so that the player understands the situation in which the player should hit right in the remaining 5 seconds).

If the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the normal time (during the non-time saving game) is not established in the reach or the normal reach is established, the effect determining means 303 rushes together with the display of the variation effect (for example, overlaid on the variation effect). The effect may be displayed and the right-handed navigation may be displayed in a relatively large size. On the other hand, if the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is in the process of establishing super reach, the right-handed navigation may be displayed in a relatively small size without displaying the rush effect. That is, the effect determining means 303 may be displayed with the priority of reach unestablished or normal reach <general power opening effect <super reach. It should be noted that the first hit of the normal symbol can be established even while the change of the special symbol is not executed in the normal state. Therefore, even if the variable effect is not displayed, the normal electric opening effect can be displayed. As for the display priority, in the drawing process for the effect display device 60, the one displayed overlaid on the foreground is treated as a high priority, the one having a large size of the effect display area is treated as a high priority, and the like. Any display mode, such as a composite, which is intended to be visually recognized by the player with priority, may be used.

2. 2. Configurations related to multiple variable pattern modes:
FIG. 29 shows a plurality of types of variation pattern modes. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment includes a plurality of types of variation pattern modes in which the selection tendency of the variation patterns of the special figures 1 and 2 is different. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation patterns of the special figures 1 and 2 are determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern tables that are different for each fluctuation pattern mode. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern table referred to in mode N is referred to as a mode N table.

The main board 200 of the first embodiment stores a mode 0 table to a mode 7 table. The first variation pattern determining means 231 selects one of the mode 0 table to the mode 2 table according to the gaming state, and determines the variation pattern of the special figure 1 with reference to the selected variation pattern table. The second variation pattern determining means 232 selects one of the mode 0 table and the mode 3 table to the mode 7 table according to the gaming state, and determines the variation pattern of the special figure 2 with reference to the selected variation pattern table. .. In other words, after the special game is completed, the mode states of the fluctuation pattern tables of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are individually switched according to the number of fluctuations of each. By doing so, among the time-saving end conditions provided for Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, in particular, refer to the timing when there is acceptance that you want to produce a special effect such as the final change of the time-saving game of Special Figure 2. It is possible to solve the problem that the table to be sought shifts due to the execution of the fluctuation of the special figure 1.

The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the mode 1 table for 7 fluctuations in special figure 1 after the 4R big hit (after the end of the special game) once in a short time, and then selects the fluctuation pattern in the mode 0 table. Refer to it and select the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. Further, in the case of the big hit (15R, 10R, 5R, 4R) of 9 times in a short time, the first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 refers to the 7 fluctuations of the special figure 1 after the end of the special game, and the fluctuation pattern with reference to the mode 2 table. After that, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 is selected with reference to the mode 0 table. The 7 fluctuations in Special Figure 1 after the end of the special game correspond to the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1, which is the condition for ending the time reduction. Both the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table define a fluctuation pattern of ultra-shortening fluctuation (about 3 seconds in the first embodiment). In other words, both the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table are set so that the ultra-shortening variation is selected.

When the variation pattern of mode 1 or mode 2 is selected by the first variation pattern determining means 231, the effect determining means 303 displays an effect indicating that the rush effect (effect mode of the time saving game) is being prepared. May be good. Further, the effect determining means 303 may select a variable effect pattern (and a notice effect pattern, the same applies hereinafter) for displaying the dummy round effect, and display the dummy round effect. The dummy round effect may be content that makes it appear as if the special game is currently in progress, or it may be content that makes it appear as if the final round of the special game is continuing. When the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table is a hit, it may be possible to select "hit notification effect fluctuation (10 seconds)" other than "ultra-shortening fluctuation". It is preferable that the decorative symbol display on the effect display device 60 regarding the variation of the special figure 1 selected by the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table is executed so as not to be conspicuous in a corner portion of the display area or the like. When the mode 1 table and the mode 2 table fluctuate for the fifth time, etc., the player may have left-handed without understanding the gameplay, so a dedicated right-handed guidance effect is displayed. It may be a thing.

As a modification, at least one of mode 1 and mode 2 may not be provided. When Mode 1 and Mode 2 are provided, the change in Special Figure 1 will occur when the villa is left-handed when the consecutive villa ends due to the change in Special Figure 2 (except when the time reduction ends due to the 7-time change in Special Figure 1). This is because there is a possibility of ultra-shortening fluctuation. Further, as another modification, when the mode 1 and the mode 2 are provided, a dedicated effect corresponding to the ultra-shortening variation of the special figure 1 is provided, and the effect determining means 303 is used in the special figure 1 variation after the end of the consecutive villa state. The special effect may be displayed.

The second variation pattern determining means 232 selects the variation pattern of the special figure 2 with reference to the mode 3 table for the first variation of the special figure 2 after the 4R big hit of one time reduction, and then refers to the mode 0 table. Then, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 is selected. Since the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the normal state is a chance to acquire the small hit V, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 in the mode 0 is a fluctuation pattern for chance production. When the variation pattern for chance effect is selected by the second variation pattern determination means 232, the effect determination means 303 selects the variation effect pattern for displaying the chance effect and displays the chance effect.

Further, the mode 3 table is set so that a variation pattern for chance production is selected. Chance production includes hold charge production. The hold charge effect is an effect that encourages the accumulation of the hold of the special figure 2. The hold charge effect may be (1) a content that prompts the player to shoot a game ball aiming at the second starting port 12, (2) a content that prompts a right-handed strike, and (3) a right-handed strike. If you do not do this, the content may suggest that it will be disadvantageous. When the variation pattern for chance effect is selected by the second variation pattern determination means 232, the effect determination means 303 selects the variation effect pattern for displaying the chance effect, and selects the opportunity effect (hold charge effect) as the special figure variation effect. Including) is displayed.

The fluctuation pattern of the mode 3 table is a new launch of the game ball in a short time-passing the operating port-open lottery, normal symbol fluctuation-normal symbol hit-normal electric accessory 90 fluctuation time longer than expected to be required to open. To specify. Here, if there is a deviation in the open lottery, it is preferable that the fluctuation time of the open lottery and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is set to 2 fluctuations or more as insurance. The reason for designing in this way includes "when there is a game ball of 4 balls (upper limit of the number that can be held in Special Figure 2)" in the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and mode 3 This is because four hold of special figure 2 cannot be stored unless the ordinary electric accessory 90 is operated at least once while the table is being changed. If the fluctuation in the mode 3 table is a small hit or a big hit, the game will be in a time-saving game state even after the special game, so that the effect of notifying the hit immediately is displayed, which is shorter than the above time. Or it may include what is executed.

The second variation pattern determining means 232 refers to (1) mode 4 table once, (2) mode 5 table once, and (3) mode 6 table 7 times in the case of a big hit of 9 times. (4) The mode 7 table is referred to four times, and the fluctuation patterns for the 13 fluctuations of the special figure 2 are selected for the four hold during the time reduction and after the time reduction ends.

The mode 4 table defines a fluctuation pattern for the big hit end demonstration effect as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 initial fluctuation in the time saving. When the variation pattern for the jackpot end demo effect is selected by the second variation pattern determination means 232, the effect determination means 303 selects the variation effect pattern for displaying the jackpot end demo effect and displays the jackpot end demo effect. The jackpot end demo production shows the end of the jackpot (current number of consecutive villas, cumulative total number of balls, etc.), content indicating the entry into a shorter time, content prompting right-handedness, production mode selection screen for rush production (normal) Character selection such as type, more notice type, and one-shot notification type) may be included. The reason why the big hit end demo effect is displayed by the first change of the special figure 2 in the time saving is to encourage the right-handed hit and to save the special figure 2 hold. As another effect, it becomes easy to hide the special figure 1 change executed before the special figure 2 change, and it becomes easy to shorten the time from the end of the jackpot seen by the player to the start of the special figure 2 change.

When the effect determining means 303 receives a command (not information including the fluctuation pattern of the mode 4 table) instructing the execution of the jackpot end demo from the main board 200, the effect determining means 303 receives a round effect (for example, the effect of the final round of the special game). May continue. In this case, if the player stops the launch of the game ball in the final round, the special figure 2 hold does not occur, and there is a possibility that the end demo (special figure 2 variation production by the mode 4 table) does not occur forever. Therefore, the effect determining means 303 produces a content that prompts a right-handed strike, in other words, a content that prompts a launch aimed at the second starting port 12, after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the command instructing the execution of the jackpot end demo. You may display the effect of. In particular, it is the first hit (big hit during non-time reduction), and when shifting to the game state of 9 times of time reduction corresponding to the rush effect, there is often no hold of special figure 2, so only at the first hit The end demo effect may be executed at the actual jackpot end demo time of the main board 200. In that case, the mode 4 table is omitted and the number of mode 6 tables is increased by one. In addition, when the fluctuation in the mode 4 table is a big hit or a small hit, the number of rounds (out) acquired in addition to the number of rounds (number of balls) of the previous special game is changed to (or in addition to) the big hit end demo. It may have a device that notifies the number of balls) and notifies the effect that two big hits and small hits are continuous. In addition, it is possible to change the hit fluctuation of the mode 4 table from the end demo production without discomfort by executing the effect of notifying in advance that the hit is also included in the hold at the start demo of the big hit and the small hit. However, at that time, in the production of the start demo, by setting the subsequent hit type to non-notification, it is possible to execute the notification production of the hit type when the actual fluctuation of the subsequent hit is executed. Even during a big hit, you can wait with a sense of expectation without knowing how many balls will be added.

The mode 5 table to the mode 7 table may include a plurality of types of effects (first fanning effect, second fanning effect, third fanning effect, ..., normal effect, etc.), and the selection probability of each effect. It may be a table in which different values are set for. By separating the variation pattern table, the appearance frequency of the effect can be changed, and for example, it becomes easy to avoid the end of the consecutive villa state without the fanning effect even once. As a modification, the variation pattern shown in FIG. 2 may be determined from one variation pattern table for the second variation when the time reduction is applied 9 times to the four variation after the time reduction is omitted. Further, when the fluctuation time of the mode 5> the fluctuation time of the mode 6, the order of the mode 5 and the mode 6 is exchanged in order to secure a long fluctuation time of the final fluctuation in the time saving and to store the hold of the special figure 2 up to the upper limit. You may.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment does not provide a variation pattern table dedicated to the final variation for notifying the player of the ball output at the time-saving game end timing, which is often seen in general pachinko gaming machines. The final variation in this embodiment is the variation in which the special figure 2 hold after the end of the time reduction becomes 0 (mainly the fourth variation after the end of the time reduction), and is typically the final variation of the special figure 2 in the continuous villa state. .. The reason is that the small hit probability of Special Figure 2 is as high as 1/10, so it is better not to make a difference from other fluctuations during the rush until then. In addition, if a fluctuation pattern table dedicated to the ball output display is provided, it is normal in irregular situations such as when the time reduction ends due to the special figure 1 fluctuation or when there are only three special figure 2 holds at the end of the time reduction. There is a possibility that the ball ejection notification effect will be displayed (original chance effect) during the special figure 2 fluctuation accompanying the normal symbol hit at the time. In order to avoid this, it is preferable not to provide a fluctuation pattern table dedicated to ball ejection notification.

Here, the configuration of the ball ejection notification will be described. The effect determining means 303 is (1) when the change of the special symbol that triggers the end of the time reduction ends as a result of deviation, or (2) the second winning / failing lottery value remaining after the end of the time reduction (that is, special figure 2 hold). When the fluctuation based on is ended as a result of deviation, the effect related to the ball output up to that point (hereinafter referred to as "ball output notification effect") is displayed for a predetermined time. The display time of the ball ejection notification effect may be, for example, 5 seconds. The above (1) and (2) are cases where the effect state to be controlled by the effect determining means 303 returns from the time saving state (rush effect) to the normal time. Further, the above (1) is a case where the hold of the special figure 2 does not exist at the time when the final fluctuation of the time reduction is completed. When the fluctuation of the above (1) or (2) becomes a big hit (including a small hit V), the ball ejection notification effect is not executed until the end of the next time reduction.

The ball output notification effects are (1) ball output during special games, (2) ball output during small hit games, and (3) ball output during short hours (special figure 2 prizes from winning openings such as the start opening and general winning openings). Regarding the sphere), the content that notifies only (1), the content that notifies (1) + (2), the content that notifies (1) + (3), or the content that notifies (1) + (2) + (3) The content may be notified. The notified ball payout may be the total payout during this consecutive villa period when one or more special games are continuously executed with one or more time reductions in between. In addition, the reported balls are the total of the first hits in FIG. 26 and the balls in the consecutive villa state, in other words, the balls released from the occurrence of the first hit in the normal time to the return to the normal time after the consecutive villa state. It may be a total.

Further, the number of balls to be paid out may be the number of game balls paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 500 (the number of prize balls), and the number of out-of-game balls is subtracted from the number of game balls paid out. It may be a number (so-called net increase). The effect determining means 303 may acquire the number of paid out game balls from the payout control board 155, or obtain the number of out balls from the out detection device 39 and count the number of balls to be paid out.

When the special symbol (that is, special figure 1) indicating the result of the hit / fail determination based on the ball entering the first starting port 11 is changing, the effect determining means 303 outputs the ball in a manner higher in visibility than the variable effect. Display the notification effect. Specifically, the effect determining means 303 may temporarily hide the variable screen of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 except when the decorative symbol 61 is stopped and display, and display the ball ejection notification effect. .. Further, the effect determining means 303 may display the ball ejection notification effect in an area different from the variation display area (stop display area) of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1. Further, when displaying the ball ejection notification effect, the effect determining means 303 may display the special figure 1 variation on a screen smaller than the normal screen (wipe or the like) or a screen smaller than the display screen of the ball ejection notification effect. Good.

According to this aspect, the variable effect related to the special figure 2 having a relatively high probability of a small hit is displayed without being hindered by the ball ejection notification effect, and the time saving effect mode (rush effect) is terminated according to various situations. In that case, it is possible to notify the ball ejection at a suitable timing and mode. The effect determining means 303 is used when (1) both the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 change have not been executed for a predetermined time, or (2) the change of the special figure 1 is started after the time reduction ends. (Except when 10 minutes or more have passed after the end of the rush effect), the ball ejection notification timing may be determined and the ball ejection notification effect may be displayed.

3. 3. Composition related to chance production:
The effect determining means 303 is in special figure 2 variation when the variation pattern mode of special figure 2 is mode 0 (in other words, when the special figure 2 variation pattern of mode 0 is selected by the second variation pattern determining means 232). , Display the chance production. The chance effect is displayed at the time of (1) special figure 2 hold occurrence when the normal symbol is the first hit in the normal time of FIG. 26. In addition, (2) is displayed during the remaining hold (Special Figure 2 hold) digestion after the end of the time reduction after the 4R jackpot of one time reduction. In either case, 4 fluctuations in Special Figure 2 are assumed.

It should be noted that the gaming state of the main board 200 is the same (normal state) during the above (1) and (2), after the big hit of 9 times of time reduction, and during the remaining hold (holding of special figure 2) after the end of the time reduction. However, since the fluctuation pattern modes are different (different fluctuation patterns are selected from different fluctuation pattern tables), the former and the latter display different effects. The former is a chance production and the latter is a rush production.

The effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the above-mentioned hold charge effect when the normal symbol is the first hit (long open) in the normal state. The effect determining means 303 may display the hold charge effect for the time when the ordinary electric accessory 90 is controlled to be in the open state. The hold charge effect may include an effect of notifying the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (a general electric opening effect). In addition, the hold charge effect may include an effect (chance rush effect) that foretells the entry into the chance effect.

The hold charge effect and the chance rush effect have a high priority among the image effects displayed by the effect determination means 303 (for example, error display, right-handed display, decorative symbol at the time of stop display, hold number display, etc. The priority is lower than the information required for the game, and the priority is higher than other notice effects that are changing). This is because, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the presence or absence of acquisition of the small hit V has a great influence on the ball output, and it is important to save the special figure 2 hold in order to acquire the small hit V. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 500 is provided with an accessory (referred to as a "special accessory" here) having a high probability of a jackpot expectation (for example, about 70%) when operated in a specific mode, the special accessory May be prioritized over the hold charge effect and the chance rush effect. In addition, while the hold charge effect and the chance entry are displayed, the effect of activating a character other than the special character (a character with a lower expectation of a big hit than the special character) may be canceled.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation is started during the hold charge effect display in the normal time, the effect determination means 303 changes to the special figure 2 change after the display of the hold charge effect is finished (after the operation of the normal electric accessory 90 is finished). The variable display of the corresponding decorative symbol 61 is started. In this case, the effect determining means 303 may start the variation of the decorative symbol 61 based on the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special figure 2 from the middle. Further, the effect determining means 303 may display the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 in an area different from the display area of the hold charge effect during the hold charge effect display, and may display it smaller than usual. It may be displayed in an area smaller than the display area of the charge effect (wipe display, etc.).

As described in relation to FIG. 29, during the time reduction after the end of the 4R jackpot of one time reduction, the hold charge effect is displayed at the first variation of the special figure 2. The effect determining means 303 does not display the effect related to the deviation variation of the special figure 1 during the time saving (the decorative symbol 61 is displayed small so that it can be identified that it is changing). This is because the special figure 1 fluctuation during the time reduction is fixed at 3 seconds for the purpose of immediate digestion, and important contents directly related to the ball ejection are not displayed.

The effect determining means 303 is reserved in both the case where the normal symbol is the first hit (long open) in the normal state, the time is shortened after the end of the 4R jackpot of one time reduction, and the case of the first change in the special figure 2. Display the charge effect. However, the former is a production during the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 90, and the latter is a production during the fluctuation of Special Figure 2. Since the special figure 1 may fluctuate in various patterns while the ordinary electric accessory 90 is open, the effect determining means 303 displays the hold charge effect and changes the special figure 1 (including the deviation variation). The variation effect of the corresponding decorative symbol 61 is displayed smaller than the hold charge effect (wipe display, etc.).

The display priority of the hold charge effect in the normal state is set according to the status of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1. For example, the effect determining means 303 displays the hold charge effect in a form with relatively high visibility unless the variation pattern of the special figure 1 has a high importance such as super reach, and the effect determines the effect of the decorative symbol 61. May be displayed in a mode with relatively low visibility. High visibility means that the display size is large, that the colors are conspicuous (brightness, high saturation, etc.), that effects are added, and that the images are drawn in front of other effects. May include. When the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 has a high importance such as super reach, the display priority is reversed and the hold charge effect is displayed small (simply reduced) in the corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. The form may change, such as by simplifying the display), and the super reach effect corresponding to the fluctuation of Special Figure 1 may be displayed in a large size.

The effect determining means 303 is reserved in both the case where the normal symbol is the first hit (long open) in the normal state, the time is shortened after the end of the 4R big hit of one time reduction, and the case of the first variation of the special figure 2. The charge effect is displayed, and after the hold charge effect is completed, the chance effect is displayed as the variable effect shown in Special Figure 2. The effect determining means 303 basically advances the chance effect based on the player's button operation, but a dedicated effect is also provided when the button is not operated. For example, when a player operates a button, the chance effect develops into a reach effect via a plurality of notices such as notice 1, notice 2, and notice 3. On the other hand, when the player does not operate the button, the chance effect develops into a reach effect via multiple notices such as notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, notice 4, etc., but the above notice 4 is not a button. It is a dedicated effect during operation and is not displayed when the button is operated. The effect determining means 303 may draw the effect lottery of the notice 4 when there is no operation when the valid period of the button has elapsed, or draw lots for both the effects to be executed when the button is operated at the start of the fluctuation and when there is no operation. As a specification to be performed, a suggestion effect (for example, a special button image display or a mini character icon display) in which the notice 4 appears without any operation may be executed during the button validity period.

The effect determining means 303 displays the hold charge effect both in the case where the normal symbol hits the first hit (long open) in the normal state and in the case of the first change of the special figure 2 in the time saving, but the hold charge With respect to the special figure 2 hold that occurred during the display of the effect, whether it is a hit or a miss is detected (so-called look-ahead) based on the prior judgment information (preliminary hit / miss judgment information in the first embodiment). In the normal state, the effect determining means 303 pre-reads the presence or absence of the symbol big hit and the small hit, while in the time saving state, it pre-reads only the presence or absence of the small hit. This is because the big hit of the special figure 2 in the time saving state has a lower profit than the small hit V.

As described in the prerequisite technique, the effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display a hold lamp image showing the number of holds in special figure 1 and the number of holds in special figure 2 at the bottom of the screen. The effect determining means 303 displays the pre-reading result as a pending change. For example, when a certain special figure 2 hold is a small hit (or a symbol big hit) as a result of pre-reading, the effect determining means 303 performs a small hit (or a symbol big hit) from the normal mode to the hold lamp image corresponding to the special figure 2 hold. ) Is changed to a special mode. For example, when the hold lamp image indicates a present box, the shape and color of the present box may be changed.

Further, the effect determining means 303 may further execute the look-ahead of the special figure 1 hold. When the first hit of the normal symbol occurs while the pre-reading of the special figure 1 hold is being executed, the effect determining means 303 cancels the pre-reading result up to that point and the pre-reading effect that has been executed so far, and the hold charge effect. May be displayed. As an exception, the look-ahead effect that changes the lottery mode of the variable effect pattern, such as the transition of the effect zone that changes the effect tendency (type of characters appearing, world view, etc.), may be executed as it is.

Further, even if the effect determining means 303 detects a symbol jackpot by pre-reading the special figure 1 hold, if it becomes a jackpot due to fluctuations in other holds before the jackpot hold, the subsequent jackpot hold will be made in the future. The effect of notifying the jackpot is not executed. If a small hit V occurs from the first hit of a normal symbol while the big hit of special figure 1 is confirmed, the special figure 1 big hit is digested and the number of time reductions is reset without accumulating the special figure 2 hold during the time reduction. Because it becomes possible. For example, there will be a strategy that increases the possibility of a new small hit V by changing the time reduction from 1 time to 9 times.

4. Composition related to the state of consecutive villas:
The continuous villa state is a mode in which a direct transition is made at 50% of the special figure 1 big hit in the normal time, and a direct transition is made at the small hit V after the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal time. During the time reduction in the consecutive villa state, typically, the time reduction 9 times + the remaining hold 4 times are executed, and the special figure 2 lottery with a small hit probability of 1/10 is executed 13 times in total. Since the probability of winning a small hit or a big hit in 9 times of shortening time is about 61%, and the probability of winning a small hit or a big hit in the remaining 4 times of holding is about 34%, the probability that the consecutive villa state will continue is It is about 75%.

The effect determining means 303 displays a jackpot end demo and a hold charge effect (right-handed navigation) according to the fluctuation pattern of the mode 4 at the time of the first change of the special figure 2 in the time saving of the consecutive villa state. The effect determining means 303 is special when the change of the special figure 1 is executed before the first change of the special figure 2 (when the special figure 2 hold is 0) and the special figure 1 is a big hit in the short time in the continuous villa state. During the final round production of the game (or during the end demo production), a predetermined character (special character, etc.) may be operated to output an effect that makes the jackpot appear to be extended. As another aspect, whether the jackpot is extended by the appearance of the special game, such as the effect determining means 303 suspending the round effect of the special game and rewinding and playing it during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 which is the jackpot. You may make it look like. It should be noted that the same effect can be executed even when the special figure 2 fluctuation in the mode 4 table is a small hit or a big hit.

The effect determining means 303 displays a rush effect as a variable effect of the special figure 2 during the time reduction in the continuous villa state. The rush effect is designed on the assumption that the maximum number of special figure 2 holds (4 pieces) will remain at the end of the time reduction. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, the expectation of small hit V is high even if the remaining hold after the time reduction ends (small hit probability 1/10), so it is important that four special figure 2 holds are accumulated at the end of the time reduction. .. Therefore, the effect determining means 303 displays the hold charge effect even in the special figure 2 variation of the final (9th) inning in the short time in the consecutive villa state.

The hold charge effect in the special figure 2 final variation of the time saving is also the content of prompting the launch of the game ball aiming at the second starting port 12 as in the hold charge effect in the first change of the special figure 2 of the time reduction. The effect determining means 303 may display the hold charge effect in the final variation of the special figure 2 in the time saving on the corner of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61. In the first embodiment, since the special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving is 10 seconds or more, it is sufficient to display the hold charge effect only for the final fluctuation (the initial fluctuation is not included), but the special figure for a short time in the final fluctuation. When a specification in which 2 fluctuations can be selected is adopted, the hold charge effect may be displayed from the 7th fluctuation or the 8th fluctuation.

It is assumed that a player who is accustomed to a type 1 type 1 game machine is likely to make a stop during a long fluctuation of a short time, but at least by displaying a hold charge effect at the final fluctuation, it is very small hit V. It is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to obtain a large profit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment, the final variation (9th variation) of the special figure 2 in the time saving is set to have a long symbol fixing time. The symbol fixed time is the time during which the stop display is continued from the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and is the time for delaying the start of the next symbol variation based on the reserved lottery value. The symbol fixing time of the special figure 2 final variation in the time reduction is set to be equal to or longer than the opening time (6 seconds) of the ordinary electric accessory 90 accompanying the first hit of the ordinary symbol, and is set to 6 seconds in the first embodiment. The symbol fixing time at other time points may be shorter than the symbol fixing time of the special figure 2 final variation in the time reduction, and may be, for example, 1 second or 0.5 second.

On the other hand, as described above, the specific game control means 270 uses the special figure 2 when the time saving end condition is satisfied due to the change in the special figure 2, and here, when the number of changes in the special figure 2 reaches nine times. The time reduction is ended when the stop display of 2 is displayed. In other words, the time reduction is completed before the symbol fixed time shift. Therefore, even if the normal symbol becomes the first hit immediately before the end of the time reduction, the long opening of the normal electric accessory 90 ends within the symbol fixed time. Then, in the special symbol fixed time, since the time saving state has ended, the probability of becoming the first hit even if the normal symbol newly starts to fluctuate is as rare as 1/590. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of +1 special figure 2 hold for 4 special figure 2 hold at the end of the time reduction. This is because when the special figure 2 hold of +1 occurs, the possibility of small hits is higher than the design, and it is not preferable, and the chance effect is displayed immediately after the rush effect. In addition, when the normal symbol becomes the first hit at 1/590 after the end of the time reduction, the hold charge effect which is the normal electric opening effect may be executed as in the normal time. In such a case, the hold charge effect may be executed. In the case where the variation of the special figure 2 that is additionally generated after the four variation for the rush effect is the variation of the mode 0 table, the chance effect is continuously executed after the rush effect. Although the effect data increases, if it is possible to provide a variation effect pattern for the rush effect even for the variation pattern of the mode 0 table, the effect determination means 303 is continuous with the rush effect. Is determined, and the rush effect may be controlled to continue even when the mode 0 table fluctuates.

The rush effect of the first embodiment is displayed in the same manner before the end of the time reduction and after the end of the time reduction. For example, the effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern corresponding to the rush effect having the same or similar contents in both the mode 6 variation pattern and the mode 7 variation pattern. Display a rush effect with the same or similar content. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly think that the time is during the time reduction (the state where the right side is advantageous) even though the time reduction is completed (the state where the left strike is advantageous).

The effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display an image (referred to as a “right-handed recommended image”) that urges the player to strike right during the short time. The effect determining means 303 is a symbol from the 10th variation of the special figure 2 during the rush effect (that is, the 1st variation of the special figure 2 after the end of the time reduction) or after the 9th variation of the special figure 2 during the rush effect. From a fixed time, instead of the right-handed recommended image, an image (referred to as "left-handed recommended image") that urges the player to left-handed may be displayed.

However, since the production content is the same before the end of the time reduction and after the end of the time reduction, if left-handed is strongly recommended, it may cause confusion for the player, and after the end of the consecutive villa state, the ball ejection notification effect is displayed. Therefore, it is not desirable to store the special figure 1 hold in advance. Therefore, the effect determining means 303 may display the left-handed recommended image smaller than the right-handed recommended image so as not to be conspicuous. Further, the effect determining means 303 may display the left-handed recommended image instantaneously or for a short time, or may display it temporarily or at predetermined time intervals.

Further, the effect determining means 303 hides the right-handed recommended image from the 10th variation of the special figure 2 during the rush effect or from the symbol fixing time after the 9th variation of the special figure 2 during the rush effect. , The left-handed recommended image may also be hidden. In this case, left-handed operation may be recommended only in the lighting mode of the status display lamp 502. It is desirable that the timing for starting the display of the left-handed recommended image to be conspicuous is at the same time as the ball ejection notification effect or after the ball ejection notification effect. At this time, when the variation of the special figure 1 is executed, it is preferable to display the left-handed recommended image at the timing when the decorative symbol stops and the timing does not overlap in order to notify the game result. ..

The variable effect pattern for the rush effect can include (1) pseudo variable effect 4 to 8 times (minimum 4 times), (2) notice effect, and (3) reach effect (only some variable effect patterns). , (1), (1) + (2), (1) + (2) + (3), the variation effect corresponding to one variation of the special figure 2 is completed. Generally, in the small hit high probability symbol (special figure 2) in the small hit V spec, only the look-ahead information regarding the hit / fail can be notified in advance. Further, regarding the reserved lottery value, the symbol and the fluctuation pattern are unknown until the time when the symbol change based on the lottery value is executed. On the other hand, the player is accustomed to the continuous look-ahead effect including the design and the variation pattern in the conventional model, and may feel uncomfortable without such a look-ahead effect. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the degree of expectation is displayed by a pseudo look-ahead effect during a pseudo-variation effect that is similar in appearance to the look-ahead effect of the conventional model. The pseudo variation effect is actually 1 by stopping (temporarily stopping) the variation of the decorative symbol 61 for a time (0.5 seconds, etc.) less than a predetermined reference value, and then restarting the variation display of the decorative symbol 61. Although it is a fluctuation of times, it is a content that makes it look like multiple fluctuations have been made. Along with the temporary stop and re-variation of the pseudo-variation, (2) a notice effect and (3) a pseudo-look-ahead effect that suggests the execution expectation and the execution content of the reach effect are performed. As an example of the pseudo look-ahead effect, there is a chance that a combination of decorative symbols categorized into the same type (color, form, character, etc.) will be temporarily stopped in succession. The effect pattern displayed around the screen is temporarily stopped. There is an effect step-up look-ahead that transitions to a high-expected one with each re-variation.

The effect determining means 303 corresponds to the change in the immediately preceding special figure 2 according to the advance hit / fail determination information of the lottery value corresponding to the next symbol change as a look-ahead effect in the original meaning that affects the next symbol change. The zone transition symbol stop look-ahead effect may be displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol variation effect. The zone transition symbol stop look-ahead effect is a content that announces that the next symbol change will be displayed in the high expectation effect mode. In addition, the effect determining means 303 displays the zone transition symbol stop look-ahead effect by this change when the hit or miss of the next change is a small hit or a miss (executes a gap) in the special figure 2, while the next time. If the correctness of the fluctuation is the symbol jackpot of Special Figure 2, it is not necessary to execute the zone transition symbol stop look-ahead effect in this fluctuation (because of low profit). In addition, even if the next fluctuation is a small hit, if this fluctuation develops to (3) reach production, the result of the fluctuation (the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped) is focused on, so the zone Look-ahead effects that use transition symbols may be excluded from the lottery. Therefore, this look-ahead effect determines whether or not the next hold is appropriate for each change start of the special figure 2, and controls to execute the look-ahead lottery according to the type of the change change pattern to be started. On the contrary, when the final stop symbol of the fluctuation is the zone transition symbol despite the reach fluctuation, a method of notifying that the next fluctuation is confirmed may be adopted.

The effect determining means 303 hides the hold lamp image during the rush effect. This is because if the number of hold lamps is notified by the hold lamp image, the significance of the above-mentioned pseudo-variation effect is impaired. On the other hand, the effect determining means 303 displays the remaining number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 during the rush effect (during the time reduction). For example, in the second variation of the special figure 2 (the first variation of the start of the rush effect) in the time saving, since the remaining number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is eight times, "8 + EXTRA" is displayed and the special figure 2 is displayed. "7 + EXTRA" is displayed on the second fluctuation. "Extra" indicates the change due to the remaining hold of Special Figure 2 after the end of the time reduction. In addition, when the special figure 2 hold that is digested after the end of the time reduction actually occurs, for example, when the hold 4 occurs after the sixth variation of the special figure 2 in the time reduction, the effect determining means 303 “extra”. May be displayed. The display of the remaining number of fluctuations may be a number including the current fluctuation, or may be any of the number of fluctuations until the end of the time reduction excluding the current fluctuation. Further, the remaining number of times display may not be directly expressed as "remaining N times", but may be expressed as a roundabout expression such as "Nth day / 8th day + EXTRA". At this time, time elapses such as N day (morning), N day (noon), N day (night), N day AM 10:00, N day PM 2:00, N day PM 8:00, etc. Along with the display, the above (1) pseudo-variation period, (2) notice effect period, and (3) reach effect period may be displayed separately. Furthermore, when the time portion (and hour portion) of the above 12-hour notation is advanced for each pseudo-variation and the doublet "Nth day PM 5:55" is reached at a certain timing, the degree of expectation of hitting You may adopt the method of notifying that the value is high or the hit is confirmed.

5. Configuration related to game waiting demo:
The effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display an image of a predetermined game standby demo when the variation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not made in the predetermined standby demo transition time. The game standby demo may be a video showing the theme, motif, story, outline, etc. in the production of the pachinko gaming machine 500.

The standby demo transition time is set longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the normal figure holding means 242 holds the normal figure lottery value up to the upper limit. In the first embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery values is 4, and the maximum fluctuation time (in the normal state) of one fluctuation when the normal symbol is off or the second hit is 10 seconds, and the first The maximum time of one fluctuation in the case of hit is 15 seconds (in the normal state). In this case, the longest time when the first hit (long opening) of the normal symbol is notified at the latest when the normal symbol lottery value is held up to the upper limit and the change of the special symbol is not executed. Is 45 seconds (10 seconds x 3 holds + 15 seconds x 1 hold). Therefore, the standby demo transition time is set longer than 45 seconds, for example 60 seconds.

As described above, the effect determining means 303 of the game ball aiming at the second starting port 12 when the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a long time due to the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state. Display the hold charge effect that prompts the launch. By setting the standby demo transition time longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the normal symbol lottery value is held up to the upper limit, the normal symbol becomes the first hit during the display of the game standby demo and is normally electric. It is possible to prevent the accessory 90 from being opened for a long time, in other words, it is possible to prevent the hold charge effect from being displayed while the game standby demo is being displayed. As a result, it becomes easy to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to obtain the small hit V without noticing the hold charge effect. On the other hand, in the game machine of the present embodiment, since the first hit of the normal symbol has a great influence on the game playability, it is preferable to treat the variable display of the normal symbol as a state in which the game is in progress, and the normal symbol It is possible to prevent the progress state of the game based on the variable display from being mistakenly recognized as non-game by the display of the game standby demo.

As a modification, in the effect determining means 303, the entry of the game ball into any of the plurality of winning openings or the entry openings provided in the game area 81 is not detected in the above-mentioned standby demo transition time, and If the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not changing, the image of the game standby demo may be displayed. The plurality of winning openings or ball entrances include a first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, a large winning opening 20, a first operating opening 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning opening 33. The presence or absence of a ball may be detected by sensors (first start winning detection device 16, second start winning detection device 17, etc.) provided in each of the winning opening and the winning ball opening. This modification also has the same effect as that of the above embodiment.

As another modification, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the first starting port 11 and the first operating port 31 are provided close to each other in the vertical direction, and the game ball passing through the first operating port 31 is almost certainly (or 100%). ) The game area 81 (game nail, windmill, etc.) may be configured so as to enter the first starting port 11. Further, the game area 81 may be configured so that the game ball entering the first starting port 11 is limited to the game ball that has passed through the first operating port 31.

in this case,
Average fluctuation time related to digestion of 4 holdings of special symbols (here, special drawing 1) + standby demo transition time> The standby demo transition time may be set so that the maximum fluctuation time of 4 holdings of normal symbols is reached. For example, if the maximum fluctuation time of 4 hold of normal symbols is 45 seconds and the average fluctuation time of 4 hold of special symbols is 20 seconds, the standby demo transition time is longer than 25 seconds (for example, 30 seconds, etc.). ) May be set. This modification also has the same effect as that of the above embodiment.

The present invention has been described above based on the first embodiment. The first embodiment is an example, and it is understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications can be made to the combination of each component and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. An example of modification is given below.

Modification 1 will be described. As partially described in the first embodiment, the effect determining means 303 displays a hold charge effect when the ordinary electric accessory 90 is released due to the first hit of the ordinary symbol in the normal game in the normal state. You may. Then, while the hold charge effect is being displayed, the effect determining means 303 may reduce the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 (wipe display). For example, the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 may be displayed in a size smaller than the hold charge effect. Further, the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 may be displayed in a size smaller than the display size when the hold charge effect is not executed.

In the first embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in the normal game during the time reduction is shorter than the average fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in the normal game in the normal state (3 seconds in the first embodiment). ) Is fixed. In the first modification, the effect determining means 303 continuously displays the jackpot end demo and the hold charge effect from the end of the final round in the special game to the end of the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the time saving. The effect determining means 303 hides the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 while displaying the hold charge effect in the normal game during the time reduction.

During the time saving, the effect determining means 303 hides the variation effect of the decorative symbol 61 corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1, and only the stop mode that is the result of the variation effect is a simple symbol (smaller than the normal decorative symbol 61). It may be indicated by a symbol). Alternatively, only the result of hit or miss may be shown by a simple symbol. Further, when the symbol jackpot of the special figure 1 occurs during the time saving, the effect determining means 303 may notify the symbol jackpot by the operation of the special accessory described in the first embodiment.

As described above, the effect determining means 303 of the modified example 1 further reduces the visibility of the variable effect of the special figure 1 during the time saving as compared with the case where the ordinary electric accessory 90 is opened due to the first hit of the ordinary symbol in the normal time. Display it. In this way, when the variation effect of Special Figure 1 is relatively insignificant, the player can benefit from the hold charge effect, etc. by displaying or hiding the variation effect in an inconspicuous manner. Other renditions that are more important to the acquisition can be emphasized and presented.

A modified example 2 relating to the second starting port 12 will be described. FIG. 30 is a perspective view of the starting port unit 510. The starting port unit 510 is a component in which the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, and a plurality of general winning openings 33 are integrated. The start port unit 510 is provided at a position below the center decoration 64. That is, the second starting port 12 of this modification is provided in the lower center of the game area 81. FIG. 31 is a top view of the starting port unit 510, with the bottom being the front.

FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the starting port unit 510, and specifically, is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 31. The left-handed flow path 512 is a flow path that guides the left-handed game ball to the left out port 514. The right-handed flow path 516 is a flow path that guides the right-handed game ball to the right out port 518. A game ball hit right-handed, in other words, a game nail, a windmill, etc. in the game area 81 are set so that only the game ball flowing through the right flow path of the center decoration 64 can flow into the right-handed flow path 516. ..

The slide plate 520 functions as a normal electric accessory 90, and in this modified example, functions as a guiding member that guides the game ball that has flowed into the right-handed flow path 516 to the second starting port 12. When the slide plate 520 is retracted, the game ball (game ball 524 in FIG. 32) flows from the right-handed flow path 516 into the right out port 518 and does not flow into the second starting port 12. The blocking member 522 is interlocked with the slide plate 520 and projects so as to close the entrance of the second starting port 12 when the slide plate 520 is in the retracted state. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the second starting port 12. Further, the blocking member 522 is in the retracted state when the slide plate 520 is in the protruding state, and opens the entrance of the second starting port 12.

When the normal symbol hits, the open / close control means 275 of the first embodiment controls the normal electric accessory 90 to the open state, but the open / close control means 275 of the present modification puts the slide plate 520 into the protruding state. It controls and controls the blocking member 522 to the retracted state. As a result, the entrance of the right out port 518 is closed, the entrance of the second starting port 12 is opened, and the game ball that has rolled in the right-handed flow path 516 flows into the second starting port 12. According to the starting port unit 510, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the second starting port 12 when hitting a normal symbol, and it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the second starting port 12 in other situations.

Modification 3 will be described. The effect determining means 303 does not perform the hold charge effect (general open effect) when the normal symbol becomes the first hit (long open) during the hit fluctuation of the special figure 1 (typically at the time of the first hit). It may be displayed. This is to display the hold charge effect in the special figure 2 fluctuation during the time reduction after the big hit. If the special figure 2 hold is stored first, the special figure 1 hold is likely to remain at the end of the consecutive villa state due to the special figure 2 priority digestion, but the special figure 2 hold is displayed at the end of the consecutive villa state. This is because it is better not to carry out the fluctuation of FIG. 1 as much as possible. According to this configuration, if the first hit of the normal symbol is stopped and the hold charge effect is not displayed during the fluctuation of the special figure 1, the big hit of the symbol of the special figure 1 is confirmed. In the normal case immediately after the end of the consecutive villa state, if the pre-reading of the special figure 1 hold is prohibited, it can be said that it is difficult to display the important effect related to the special figure 1 fluctuation during the ball ejection notification effect. The hold charge effect may be displayed during the hit fluctuation, and the special figure 2 hold may be accumulated. In addition, the timing at which the normal symbol becomes the first hit is not during the hit fluctuation of the special figure 1, and the hit confirmation notification is given in the look-ahead of the special figure 1 (for example, the premier hold display, and the number of time reductions after the big hit is indefinite). Even when is being executed, it may have a prohibition pattern that prohibits display. By doing so, before the hit confirmation hold of Special Figure 1 is exhausted, when the small hit or big hit of Special Figure 2 shifts to the rush state, the hit of Special Figure 1 can be shortened 9 times. This is because

Modification 4 will be described. When the consecutive villa state (time reduction + 4 hold) ends in an irregular manner, specifically, when the time reduction ends with 7 fluctuations in special figure 1 or the hold of special figure 2 at the end of the time reduction is 3 In the case of the number or less, the fluctuation pattern mode of the special figure 2 at the normal time may be for rush effect (mode 3 to mode 7). In this case, when the first hit of the normal symbol occurs in the normal time, the variation pattern for the rush effect or the variation pattern for the hold charge effect is selected in the subsequent special figure 2 variation, and an unintended effect is displayed by design. There is a possibility of doing it.

In order to deal with this, the effect determining means 303 rushes in the normal game in the normal state after the special figure 1 changes a predetermined number of times after the time reduction shift or the time reduction end (for example, after the special figure 1 change ends 10 times after the time reduction shift). When the variable effect pattern for the effect is selected, the variable effect pattern for the chance effect may be selected as an alternative to display the chance effect. Alternatively, the effect determining means 303 may display an irregular effect / display by telop or the like while displaying the rush effect under the above circumstances.

Modification 5 will be described. As described above, the time saving game may end with any of the fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation pattern table of the special figure 2 is in the mode 6 selection state, the special figure 1 When the time saving game ends based on the fluctuation, and when the time saving game ends based on the fluctuation of special figure 2 when the special figure 1 is in mode 2, a small hit is further won and the ball enters a specific area. If not, the mode of the variation pattern table of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be controlled to be “0”. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the rush effect pattern from being selected by holding the special figure 2 generated from the first hit of the normal symbol in the normal state.

A modification 6 will be described. In the rush effect of the first embodiment, since the time reduction of 9 fluctuations is fixed and 1 fluctuation is relatively long (10 seconds or more), it is assumed that the player makes a stop (launch stop). Therefore, in the modified example, the number of time reductions in the consecutive villa state is made indefinite (for example, it is determined from 1 time, 3 times, 5 times, 9 times, 13 times, etc. from a plurality of types according to the winning symbol), and 1 variation is also compared. It may be a short time (about 5 seconds). In this way, it is possible to suppress the stoppage by setting the specifications so that there is a risk that the special figure 2 hold cannot be stored in the case of the stoppage.

Modification 7 will be described. It may be configured so as to easily create the fifth variation of Special Figure 2 after the end of the time reduction. For example, (1) the opening end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 90 may be set to the holding upper limit number + N (N is a positive integer) in FIG. Further, (2) the symbol fixing time at the end of the time reduction may be set to the same length as the normal time or a shorter length than the normal time. In addition, (3) the ball entry sensor (second start winning detection device 17) of the second start port 12 is arranged at a position away from the entrance of the second start port 12, and the fourth time of the special figure 2 after the time reduction is completed. After the end of the fluctuation and after the end of the fixed time (after the start of the next fluctuation), a new special figure 2 hold may be likely to occur. Further, the above (1) to (3) may be combined. In the case of the configuration of the modified example 4, instead of the priority digestion of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be drawn in parallel, or may be drawn in the order of winning.

Modification 8 will be described. When the effect determining means 303 detects by pre-reading that there is another small hit in the remaining hold when the symbol that wins the small hit fluctuates (when the small hit V fluctuates, hereinafter "current fluctuation"), the effect fluctuates this time. The big hit effect of the small hit V accompanying the above (for example, a special game effect) may be displayed with a special big hit effect having a content different from the normal big hit effect. The special jackpot effect may include a content notifying that it is confirmed that two 15R jackpots will occur. When the modified example 7 is adopted, the small hit V in the special figure 2 may be only the 15R big hit.

Further, even when the small hit V in Special Figure 2 is distributed to a plurality of types of big hits as in the first embodiment, the big hit effect notifies that the small hit V due to the fluctuation this time is the maximum profit, and after the big hit is completed. It is also possible to display a continuous effect that makes it look as if the big hit is continuing, and to display a big hit effect that makes it look like an extra hit at the next small hit V. In this case, the number of rounds of the next small hit V (additional amount per extra) is unknown at the time of the previous small hit V and cannot be notified. Therefore, after the end of the previous big hit, the continuous production is being displayed, and the next time. The additional amount (number of rounds) per extra may be notified at the start of the symbol fluctuation related to the small hit V of.

A modification 9 will be described. Here, a specific example of the production will be described. (A) and (b) of FIG. 33 are a chance effect in a normal state (an effect displayed in a normal game in a normal state with a long opening of a normal symbol, and can be said to be a normal electric opening effect, a rush effect, and a hold charge effect. .) Is shown as an example. FIG. 33A shows an aspect of the chance effect 530 when the variation effect of the special figure 1 is not a predetermined content having a high expectation such as super reach. In the chance effect 530 of FIG. 33 (a), the content for urging right-handed stroke and the special figure 2 reserved image 532 showing the number of reserved special figures 2 (two in the figure) are displayed in a large size in the center of the screen. On the other hand, the variation effect 536 of the special figure 1 which was displayed large in the center of the screen before the display of the chance effect 530 is reduced to the wipe 534 which is a small area at the corner of the screen and displayed. In addition, even when the fluctuation effect of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not executed, the normal standby screen is wiped and displayed, and even if the change of special figure 1 and the change of special figure 2 are started, the chance effect is produced. The fluctuation effect is displayed as it is on the wipe screen until is completed.

FIG. 33B shows a display mode of the chance effect 530 when the variation effect of the special figure 1 is a predetermined content having a high degree of expectation such as super reach. In the figure, the variation effect 536 of the super reach including the super reach object 538 such as the battle image of the character is displayed large in the center of the screen. On the other hand, the chance effect 530 is displayed small on the wipe 534 in the corner of the screen. The proper use of the chance effect in the normal time is shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), but the timing of determining the proper use of the chance effect is determined according to the mode of the variable effect executed at the start timing of the chance effect. For example, in the fluctuation in which the fluctuation effect of the special figure 1 becomes the super reach, if the fluctuation effect is before the transition to the super reach, the fluctuation effect is executed by the wipe display shown in FIG. Is a specification that continues to display (a specification that returns to the super reach screen when the chance production ends, that is, when the operation of the normal electric accessory 90 ends). In addition, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the specification may be changed from the aspect of FIG. 33 (a) to the aspect of FIG. 33 (b) at the timing of shifting to the high expectation effect such as super reach. It is possible to change the mode of chance production depending on whether or not a high expectation pattern such as super reach is selected as the fluctuation production pattern of Special Figure 1, but if it is configured in that way, Immediately after the start of fluctuations before the transition to Super Reach, the transition to high-expectation production will be detected first.

FIG. 34 shows an example of a chance effect during a time-saving game (for example, an effect displayed when the variable pattern mode is mode 3 and can be said to be a hold charge effect). Even in the chance production 530 during the time-saving game, the content prompting the right-handed hit and the special figure 2 reserved image 532 are displayed. On the other hand, as described in the first embodiment, the variation effect of the special figure 1 is hidden during the time-saving game, and the chance effect appears as the variation effect of the first variation of the time-saving game of the special figure 2. There is. Therefore, the fluctuation effect 536 is not displayed by the wipe 534, which is different from the normal chance effect. The reason for producing a chance effect as the variable effect of Special Figure 2 is that if the variable effect is executed only to notify the result, especially in the case of one time reduction, the game property of accumulating four holds. This is because it cannot be fully understood and may give a disadvantage to the player. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation effect when the first variation of the time reduction in Special Figure 2 is a hit, the chance effect may not be executed, or the effect for notifying the success or failure is executed after the chance effect. You may.

(Second Example)
The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. In particular, the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has features related to control or production around the small hit development jackpot, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite technology and the first embodiment will be mainly described, and the common points will be omitted. Further, among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the premise technique and the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals.

The outline of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment has the following five main features.

Features 1. Get the ball out in the small hit game:
In the conventional small hit development jackpot-equipped aircraft, two large winning openings for V acquisition having a specific area and a large winning opening for acquiring a large number of balls have been used. Since the opening of the large winning opening for V acquisition and the opening of the large winning opening for winning balls are due to the operation of different special electric accessories, the number of prize balls and the number of winning balls (regulated count) of the large winning opening for V acquisition The number) was reduced, the small hit game was ended early, and the big hit game was shifted to early. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 (machine equipped with a small hit development big hit) of the second embodiment, the number of special electric accessories (large winning openings) is one. By opening the big prize opening up to 15 times in the small hit game, it is possible to win many prize balls in the small hit game, and a new playability and interest are realized.

Feature 2. Small hit game production:
To make the player understand the possibility of getting a ball in the small hit game (that is, the first round of the small hit development big hit) after the V prize in the small hit game (that is, after the acquisition of the right of the big hit). Then, urge the player to fire.

Feature 3. Small hit development Big hit production:
Small hit development Since it is expected to win a prize ball equivalent to one round during the big hit from the first round of the big hit (that is, a small hit game), the V prize (acquisition of the right of the big hit) will be notified at the same time as the V prize. , The display of "1 round" is started to notify that a prize ball equivalent to 1 round during the big hit can be obtained.

Feature 4. Small hit development Production at the start of big hit in big hit:
Small hit development During the first round (small hit game) and the second round (first unit game of the special game) in the big hit, an effect suggesting the amount of profit that the player can obtain is executed.

Feature 5. Small hit look-ahead:
By pre-reading the hold of the small hit, it is notified that the next small hit development big hit can be obtained in a short time until the end of this small hit development big hit.

Hereinafter, the above five features will be sequentially described.
<Characteristic 1. Get the ball out in the small hit game>
FIG. 35 shows the basic structure of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment on the front side. The second starting port 12 has an ordinary electric accessory 90 which is a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state. The ordinary electric accessory 90 is also called an electric tulip (electric tulip), and various shapes and specifications can be applied. The ordinary electric accessory 90 may be of a slide type (for example, a specification that facilitates entry by moving the slide member forward or retracting backward), a tulip type, or a tongue type.

The special game control means 260 operates the special electric accessory 556 at the start of each unit game in the special game. The special game control means 260 causes the open / close control means 275 to control the specific area open / close solenoid 506, and opens the large winning opening 20 a predetermined number of times. The small hit game control means 265 operates the special electric accessory 556 once at the start of the small hit game. The small hit game control means 265 causes the open / close control means 275 to control the specific area opening / closing solenoid 506, and opens the large winning opening 20 a plurality of times during one small hit game.

The large winning opening 20 includes an opening / closing member (slide plate 540 described later) for switching between an open state and a closed state of the large winning opening 20. When the big winning opening 20 is closed, the game ball rolls on the opening / closing member. FIG. 36 is an external perspective view schematically showing the configuration of the large winning opening 20. The slide plate 540 can be said to be an opening / closing door of the grand prize opening 20. As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the slide plate 540 has a closed state of covering the top of the large winning opening 20 (box-shaped member 542) and an open state of retracting to the back as shown in FIG. 36 (b). Can be displaced between. When the slide plate 540 is in the closed state, the large winning opening 20 is also closed, and when the slide plate 540 is in the open state, the large winning opening 20 is also in the open state.

The figure shows an example of a configuration for reducing the momentum (rolling speed) of a game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 of the large winning opening 20. The slide plate 540 provided on the upper surface of the large winning opening 20 is provided so as to be slightly inclined so as to be downwardly downward with respect to the horizontal direction. As a result, the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 tends to accelerate as it is, and even if the slide plate 540 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the game ball cannot be successfully guided inside the box-shaped member 542. There is a risk.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by advancing the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 in a zigzag shape, the moving distance of the game ball is increased and the momentum of the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 is reduced. In this way, the residence time of the game ball on the slide plate 540 is increased. As a result, even when the large winning opening 20 is repeatedly opened for a short time, the game ball stays on the slide plate 540 for a long time, and the game ball enters during the short time opening. Make it more likely.

FIG. 36A shows the big winning opening 20 when the slide plate 540 is in the closed state. As shown, within the range in which the game ball rolls on the slide plate 540, a plurality of protrusions 546a are provided on the game board side, and a plurality of protrusions are also provided on the transparent plate side facing the game board. 546b is provided. Further, the plurality of protrusions 546a on the game board side and the plurality of protrusions 546b on the transparent plate side are arranged alternately along the flow path on the slide plate 540. The plurality of protrusions 546b on the transparent plate side are attached to the transparent transparent plate 544 extending upward from the box-shaped member 542. By not directly fixing the plurality of protrusions 546b to the transparent plate 103 that covers the front side of the game board 80, the protrusions 516b are exposed to the outside when the transparent plate 103 is opened for the purpose of maintenance of the game machine or the like. It is possible to prevent the state from becoming easily damaged. Further, by forming the transparent plate 544 with a transparent member, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game ball entering the large winning opening 20 from being impaired. In the modified example, a protrusion or a recess for forming a zigzag-shaped flow path may be formed on the slide plate 540.

By alternately providing the plurality of protrusions 546a and 546b on the slide plate 540, the game ball can be advanced in a zigzag manner so that the momentum of the game ball tends to be decelerated. For example, a game ball is continuously fired toward the grand prize opening 20 by hitting right (for example, one ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds), rolls on the slide plate 540, and falls to the left side of the grand prize opening 20. When the speed is reduced so that it takes 2 to 3 seconds, there are always about 3 to 5 game balls on the slide plate 540. As a result, even when the slide plate 540 is opened for a short time, as shown in FIG. 36B, a plurality of game balls can be guided together inside the large winning opening 20. The game balls that have fallen into the box-shaped member 542 pass through the passage port 548 one by one, and the winning is detected.

The number and residence time of the game balls staying on the slide plate 540 can be adjusted by changing the length and inclination angle of the large winning opening 20, the number and spacing of the protrusions 546a and 546b, and the like. In this embodiment, 1 to 3 game balls are designed to stay on the slide plate 540 when the continuous right-handed firing is continued, and the slide plate 540 is held for a short time (for example, 0.052 seconds). Even when the ball is displaced to the open state, approximately 1 to 3 game balls are adjusted to enter the inside of the box-shaped member 542 during one short-time opening. Therefore, according to the configuration of the large winning opening 20 of this embodiment, if an appropriate firing operation (for example, right-handed) is performed at an appropriate timing during the small hit game (for example, after the right-handed hit notification), the game ball can be opened for the large winning opening. You can almost certainly get the ball into 20.

The configuration of the large winning opening 20 shown in FIG. 36 is only an example, and the large winning opening 20 having a structure different from the illustrated example may be provided. For example, the opening / closing member (slide plate 540) of the large winning opening 20 may include a plurality of opening / closing members provided at distant positions, and the plurality of opening / closing members may be controlled to open / close at the same time.

FIG. 37 is a diagram schematically showing the internal configuration of the large winning opening 20, and particularly shows the configuration of the lower region 550 of the large winning opening 20. The slide plate 540 opens and closes the entrance of the large winning opening 20 according to the control of the large winning opening solenoid 92. The large winning opening solenoid 92 controls the slide plate 540 to be in an open state, and operates the slide plate 540 so as to open the entrance of the large winning opening 20, so that a game ball can flow into the inside of the large winning opening 20. And. The large winning opening solenoid 92 controls the slide plate 540 in a closed state and operates the slide plate 540 so as to close the entrance of the large winning opening 20, so that the game ball cannot flow into the inside of the large winning opening 20. And. The game balls that have entered the large winning opening 20 once flow to the left and flow into the lower region 550 of the second large winning opening 22 from the passing port 548 through which each ball can pass. The large prize detection device 25 detects the entry of the game ball into the large prize opening 20 in order to give the prize ball, and specifically detects the game ball that has passed through the passage port 548 and has fallen into the lower region 550. To do.

A discharge path 554 is provided in the lower region 550 of the grand prize opening 20. The discharge route 554 is a route for discharging the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 20 to the outside of the large winning opening 20, and is typically a route for discharging the game ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 500. .. Further, in the lower region 550, a specific region opening / closing device 552 is provided in the middle of the flow path from the passage port 548 to the discharge path 554. The specific area that is the condition for transition to the small hit development big hit corresponds to the area under the specific area switchgear 552, and can be passed when the specific area switchgear 552 is opened, and the specific area switchgear 552 is closed. In that case, it becomes impossible to pass.

The specific area switchgear 552 operates so as to switch between an open state that enables passage to the specific area and a closed state that makes it impossible to pass through the specific area. The specific area switchgear 552 has a slide member or a valve member that operates in response to the control of the specific area switchgear solenoid 506. The specific area opening / closing device 552 operates so as to open the flow path to the specific area, so that the game ball can pass through the specific area and is in an open state, and operates so as to block the flow path to the specific area. As a result, it becomes a closed state that prevents the game ball from passing through the specific area. It is expected that the specific area opening / closing device 552 shifts to the open state when the large winning opening 20 is opened, and after the large winning opening 20 is closed, the internal game ball flows down to the position of the specific area opening / closing device 552. It waits for the design value and operates so that it will be closed after the transition to the closed state of the big winning opening.

The specific area passage detection device 504 is provided at a position below the specific area opening / closing device 552, and detects the passage of the game ball in the specific area. When the game ball passes through the specific area, the specific area passage detection device 504 generates specific area passage information indicating the passage. Upon receiving the specific area passage information, the ball entry determination means 201 of the main board 200 determines that the game ball has passed the specific area.

In the second embodiment, both the unit game and the small hit game in the special game end when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 reaches the same predetermined number (10 in the embodiment). In other words, both the operation end condition of the special electric accessory 556 in the unit game of the special game and the operation end condition of the special electric accessory 556 in the small hit game reach 10 balls in the large winning opening 20. Including that. Specifically, the special game control means 260 ends the one unit game of the special game when a predetermined time has passed or when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 reaches 10. End as if is satisfied. The small hit game control means 265 ends the small hit game on the assumption that the end condition is satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed or when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 reaches 10. The V prize is not the end condition of the small hit game, and even after the V prize, the small hit game continues until the end condition is satisfied.

The opening time of the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game is set to a short time during which the game ball rolling on the slide plate 540 can enter the large winning opening 20. Further, the small hit game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for a short time via the open / close control means 275 in one small hit game (during one operation of the special electric accessory 556). Can be repeated a predetermined maximum number of times. This upper limit is equal to or greater than the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 (that is, 10), which is the end condition of one unit game and the small hit game in the special game (in other words, the operation end condition of the special electric accessory 556). The number of times. In the embodiment, the number of balls entered is 15 times, which is larger than the number of balls entered. When the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game reaches 10, the small hit game control means 265 may open the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game less than the upper limit number (15 times). At that point, the big winning opening 20 is closed and the small hit game is ended.

The small hit game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for a short time (opening time 0.052 seconds) and opens the large winning opening 20 from the first to the twelfth times in the small hit game. Repeat the set of short-time closure (closing time 1 second). Further, the small hit game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for a short time (opening time 0.052 seconds) and the large winning opening 20 for the opening of the 13th and 14th large winning openings 20 in the small hit game. Perform a set of long-term closure (closing time 4 seconds). Further, the small hit game control means 265 executes an operation with an opening time of 0.052 seconds for opening the 15th big winning opening 20 in the small hit game, and when the 15th opening is completed, or an operation end condition. When a specified number of game balls have entered, the game is closed for 3.5 seconds.

According to the configuration of feature 1, only one large winning opening is arranged in the game area 81, in other words, the large winning opening for obtaining the V winning and the large winning opening for increasing the number of balls are shared. Therefore, it is possible to secure a wide board area for displaying the effect and operating the accessory, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect. Further, in the small hit game, the same special electric accessory 556 as in the special game is operated, so that the payout is performed with a common number of prize balls, and the small hit game is controlled in the above-mentioned opening mode. Based on this, since a predetermined number of balls, which is a condition for ending the operation of the special electric accessory, can be expected, it is possible to obtain the same number of balls as one unit game of the special game, which is sufficient for the player. Can give a feeling.

As described in connection with FIG. 36, when the player continues to shoot the game ball, the game ball stays on the slide plate 540 of the large winning opening 20, so that the large winning opening 20 is once in the small hit game. Even if the opening time is short, at least one ball can be expected to enter. However, there is a possibility that the right-handed hit of the game ball may be delayed because the player does not notice the start of the small hit game. Therefore, the number of times the large winning opening 20 is opened in the small hit game is set to be equal to or greater than the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 which is the end condition of the small hit game (in the embodiment, the number of times is larger than the number of balls entered). Therefore, in the small hit game, it becomes easy to obtain the same number of balls as one unit game of the special game.

Furthermore, regarding the opening of the large winning opening 20 for the 13th and 14th times in the small hit game, the closing time is relatively long to promote the player's awareness and the small hit game without the game ball being fired. Is ended, that is, the opportunity to acquire the small hit development big hit is missed, and the time reduction ends based on the occurrence of the small hit game, so that the small hit is originally generated with a high probability (small hit V). It becomes easy to prevent the change of the second special symbol that can be received from becoming difficult to execute. However, if the number of times of closing for a long time is increased too much, the number of out balls (so to speak, waste balls) that pass through the slide plate 540 of the large winning opening 20 when the player continuously fires the game balls increases. Therefore, by closing the large winning opening 20 for a long time twice in the small hit game, it is possible to suppress the end of the small hit game without the V winning and the suppression of the increase in the number of out balls.

In the second embodiment, the opening time of each of the opening times of the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game is set to 0.052 seconds, but as a modified example, at least one opening time is set. However, it may be different from other opening times. For example, the small hit game control means 265 may open the large winning opening 20 for 0.052 seconds 13 times and open the large winning opening 20 for 0.104 seconds once during the small hit game. .. That is, it suffices that at least one of the game balls rolling on the slide plate 540 of the large winning opening 20 is released 10 times or more for the time when it is assumed that the ball enters the large winning opening 20.

<Feature 2. Small hit game production ＞
The effect determining means 303 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 60 during the small hit game, and changes the display mode of the effect image according to the ball entering the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game. .. This effect image includes a first effect image and a second effect image. In the second embodiment, the effect determining means 303 determines whether to display the first effect image or the second effect image by a predetermined effect lottery (in other words, with a predetermined probability). As a modification, the effect determining means 303 may be configured to display only one of the first effect image and the second effect image during the small hit game.

The first effect image is an image corresponding to the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20, which is a condition for ending the small hit game. As described above, the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 (that is, the specified count number), which is the end condition of the small hit game, can be said to be the maximum number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game. The number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20, which is the end condition of the unit game in the game, is 10 balls.

FIG. 38 shows an example of the effect during the small hit game. The effect determining means 303 causes the effect display device 60 to display the small hit game effect screen 560 during the execution of the small hit game. The small hit game effect screen 560 includes a right-handed instruction image 562, a V notification image 568, a round image 564, and a ball entry number notification image 566 as a first effect image for urging the player to hit right. The V broadcast image 568 and the round image 564 will be described later. The number of balls entered notification image 566 includes the same number of treasure box images as the number of balls entered (10 balls) into the large winning opening 20, which is a condition for ending the small hit game. In FIG. 38, an unopened treasure chest is shown by a rectangular parallelepiped, and an opened treasure chest is shown by a star.

The effect determining means 303 switches one unopened treasure chest image to an opened treasure chest image each time the ball entering the large winning opening 20 is detected by the ball entry determining means 201 during the small hit game. .. This suggests to the player that it is possible to enter 10 balls into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game, in other words, it is possible to obtain a large number of balls during the small hit game. It is possible to encourage the player to launch a game ball during the hit game.

The second production image will be described. The second effect image is an image showing the degree of expectation (hereinafter, also referred to as “expectation degree image”) that suggests high profit (possibility of acquiring many balls) in the later suggestion effect. It can be said that the expectation degree image is an image suggesting that there is a possibility of getting a lot of balls in a later game. The details will be described below.

Similar to the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the first embodiment (FIG. 28), the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment also stopped in a mode in which the symbol variation indicates a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a “small hit symbol”). In this case, the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit differs depending on the small hit symbol. In the second embodiment, the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit is divided into 10 rounds and 4 rounds according to the small hit symbol (in each case, the first round is a small hit game).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, the number of times of shortening the time (in other words, the number of times of continuing the electric chew support) differs depending on the small hit symbol. Specifically, if the small hit symbol is of a specific type, it will be a small hit development big hit with 10 rounds and 100 times of time saving continuation, and if the small hit symbol is another type, it will be 10 rounds and 9 times of time saving continuation. It will be a hit development jackpot, or a small hit development jackpot with 4 rounds and 9 times of short duration. When the number of times of shortening the working hours is 100 times, the next small hit will almost certainly occur during the shortening of the working hours (during the rush production), resulting in a continuous villa.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the second embodiment, in the case of the big hit of the symbol of Special Figure 1, (1) 10 rounds and 9 times of continuous time reduction, (2) 4 rounds and short time continuation, depending on the big hit symbol. It is divided into a jackpot of 9 times, (3) 4 rounds and a jackpot of 1 time reduction continuation number. The distribution probabilities of (1) to (3) in the examples are 1%, 49%, and 50%. The symbol jackpot of special figure 2 is a jackpot of 4 rounds and 9 times of shortening continuation times.

When a V prize is generated in the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 allows the player to perform the small hit symbol according to the type of the symbol indicating the small hit (that is, the type of the small hit symbol when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) after the small hit game is completed. Display one of multiple types of suggestive effects that suggest the profits that can be obtained. For example, a plurality of types of suggestion effects are associated with any of a plurality of types of small hit symbols, and are determined by the number of rounds of the small hit development jackpot, each number of time reductions after the end of the small hit development jackpot, or , It may be provided for each combination of the number of rounds and the number of times of shortening the time. In addition, the contents of the plurality of types of suggestion effects (motifs, characters, colors, etc.) differ depending on the size of the profit that the player can obtain. The suggestion effect will be described later in the description of feature 4.

The effect determining means 303 is an expectation image showing the degree of expectation that a high profit (for example, a big hit of 10 rounds or a time saving of 100 times is given) is suggested in the above-mentioned suggestion effect during the small hit game. Is displayed. For example, the effect determination means 303 may display an expectation degree image instead of the ball entry number notification image 566 on the small hit game effect screen 560 shown in FIG. 38, and displays the expectation degree image together with the ball entry number notification image 566. It may be displayed. Further, the V notification image 568, which is an image notifying that the V prize has been won, in other words, an image notifying the acquisition of the right to win the jackpot, may be used as the expectation degree image.

The effect determining means 303 changes the expectation degree image according to the ball entering the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game. The effect determining means 303 may change any one of the shape, pattern, and color of the expectation image according to the ball entering the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game. For example, (1) the expectation image is the V notification image 568, and (2) the colors of the V notification image are red, orange, yellow, green, and white from the one with the highest expectation of profit that the player can obtain. (3) It is assumed that the small hit symbol corresponds to 10 rounds and 100 times of time saving continuation. In this case, the effect determining means 303 may initially display the V notification image in white when the V winning is detected in the small hit game. After the V winning, each time a predetermined number (for example, one or two balls) of balls are detected in the large winning opening 20, the effect determining means 303 changes the color of the V notification image to green, yellow, orange, or red. It may be changed in the order of.

In the above example, when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game increases, the V notification image is finally displayed in red, so that the player's expectation for the subsequent suggestion effect and profit status Can be enhanced. In this way, as the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game increases, the accuracy of the expectation image increases, in other words, the reliability of the content of the suggestion effect after the expectation image shows increases. That is, by entering the ball into the large winning opening during the small hit game, it is possible to identify the degree of expectation that a high profit is suggested by the subsequent suggestion effect, so that the game ball is played during the small hit game (especially after the V prize). It is possible to give the player an incentive to launch. Further, even in the small hit game, the player can be impressed with the playability of being able to obtain the ball output equivalent to one round of the special game.

The V notification image 568 is an image displayed after the game ball is detected by the specific area passage detection device 504 inside the large winning opening 20, and is a game ball that has already been entered in the small hit game when the display is started. Since the number (the number of remaining balls that can be entered) may vary depending on the situation, the initial display should be unified according to the mode at the time of entry, such as white (or green from the beginning as a chance-up pattern that will eventually become red or higher), and then entry. The mode that changes according to the ball is displayed by skipping the change mode in the middle when changing according to the winning, according to the predetermined change pattern from the time of entering the second ball to the time of entering the third ball. Can be adopted. In this case, "white (initial)", "green (3)", "yellow (5)", "orange (7)" (the numbers are the timing of change, the number of game balls entered during the small hit game. In the pattern of (shown), when the passage is detected by the specific area passage detection device 504 on the 4th ball, "white" is displayed as the V notification image, and the V notification image is displayed when the next game ball enters (5th ball). Will be "yellow". By adopting the method of skipping the display mode in the middle in this way, it is not necessary to have a production determination table depending on which ball has passed the specific area, and further, when entering the ball, the lottery result is fixed. Since it is displayed, it is possible to identify whether or not the display of the initial mode was a chance pattern and the final change mode. As for the pattern that changes according to the entry into the large winning opening 20, it is permissible to have an additional pattern that defines the 11th and 12th balls, which are called over-winning over the specified count number (usually). The final aspect corresponds to the 10th ball, and the over-winning portion is the same as the 10th ball, or the production pattern is set so that an exceptional premiere appears).

Further, the effect determining means 303 may change the expectation image with a predetermined probability (for example, 30% or the like) so that the expectation image shows a content different from the content of the suggestion effect. For example, when the content of the later suggestion effect suggests high profit, it may be changed to an expectation image showing that the expectation is low. Similarly, when the content of the later suggestion effect suggests low profit, it may be changed to an expectation degree image showing that the expectation degree is high. As a result, it is possible to mix the expectation and anxiety of the player, or to make the player feel unexpected, and to enhance the interest of the game.

A modified example related to the feature 2 will be described. The sub-board 300 may further include a prize ball counting means for counting the number of prize balls paid out (number of balls to be paid out). The payout control board 155 or the main board 200 may notify the sub board 300 of the number of prize balls paid out. The prize ball counting means may count the number of prize balls paid out during the small hit game and the special game based on the number of prize balls notified from the payout control board 155 or the main board 200. Alternatively, the ball entry determination means 201 of the main board 200 may notify the sub board 300 of information indicating the ball entry of the game ball into each winning opening. The prize ball counting means may count the number of prize balls paid out during the small hit game and the special game based on the information indicating the entry into the large winning opening 20 notified from the main board 200. .. The number of prize balls when one ball is entered into the large prize opening 20 is 12.

The effect determining means 303 of this modification displays the small hit game effect screen 560 as shown in FIG. 38 during the small hit game, and the small hit game effect screen 560 is counted by the prize ball counting means. Display the winning prize ball information indicating the number of prize balls paid out during the game. Here, the winning prize ball information is in the format of "○ departure / × departure". "From ○" indicates the number of prize balls paid out so far in this hit. "X departure" indicates the maximum number of prize balls that can be paid out in this hit, in other words, the maximum number of prize balls that the player can obtain in this hit.

As described above, the small hit game of the second embodiment is designed so that a predetermined count number (that is, 10 balls) can be entered while the large winning opening 20 is repeatedly opened 15 times for a short time. Therefore, "120 shots" (12 prize balls x 10 hits per entry), which is the number of prize balls in the specified count number, may be displayed for "x shots" during the small hit game. However, since the small hit game is a specification that repeats short opening and the acquisition of the prize ball is not certain, the production determination means 303 of this modified example is for both "○ departure" and "× departure" during the small hit game. , The initial value is set to "0 shots", and 12 shots are added each time a ball is entered into the large winning opening 20. As a result, even if 10 balls are not entered into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game due to the opening / closing timing of the large winning opening 20, the player is less likely to feel dissatisfied.

As will be described later in relation to the feature 4, the effect determining means 303 displays a suggestion effect suggesting the type of big hit (number of rounds, etc.) at the start of the special game in the small hit development big hit. The effect determining means 303 of this modification updates the “x shot” of the acquired prize ball information to a value corresponding to the number of rounds at the timing of displaying the suggested effect, in other words, at the timing of suggesting the number of rounds. Specifically, the value of "x departure" up to that point (that is, the number of prize balls won during the small hit game) is (number of rounds-1) x 12 prize balls per entry x 10 times. Is set to "x departure". For example, in the case of 10 rounds, the value obtained by adding 1080 shots to the number of prize balls won during the small hit game is set to "x shots".

According to the configuration of this modified example, by presenting the number of winning prize balls to the player even in the first round of the small hit development big hit (small hit game), it becomes easy for the player to have a sufficient feeling of coming out. It should be noted that the effect determining means 303 may execute a round number promotion effect during the special game to increase the number of rounds of the special game in appearance (for example, increase from 4 rounds to 10 rounds). In this case, the effect determining means 303 may update "x shots" according to the apparent number of rounds (add "720 shots" for a difference of 6 rounds when the promotion effect occurs). Further, the winning prize ball information may further include the cumulative number of prize balls during the consecutive villas (that is, while the jackpot acquisition during the time reduction is repeated), and the production determining means 303 is in the consecutive villas counted by the prize ball counting means. The total number of prize balls paid out to may be displayed as the cumulative number of prize balls.

<Feature 3. Small hit development Big hit production ＞
As shown in the small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 38, when a V prize is generated during the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 displays a V notification image 568, which is an effect of notifying that the V prize has been won. Further, the effect determining means 303 displays a round image 564 showing the cumulative number of times the special electric accessory 556 has been operated from the small hit game to the special game, triggered by the V prize in the small hit game.

The effect determining means 303 displays a round image 564 indicating that it is the first operation of the special electric accessory 556 during the small hit game after the V prize. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, a round image 564 showing the first round is displayed. During the small hit game, the slide plate 540 of the large winning opening 20 is opened up to 15 times, but the special electric accessory 556 is operated once. When the small hit symbol corresponds to the big hit of 10 rounds, the round image 564 showing the 10th round is displayed in the final round of the small hit development big hit.

According to the feature 3, an image showing the "first round" or the like is displayed even during the small hit game, that is, a series of count displays are performed from the small hit game to the special game. This suggests that it is possible to obtain a ball equivalent to one round of the special game in the small hit game, and it is possible to encourage the player to shoot the game ball even after winning the V during the small hit game. If there is no V prize in the small hit game, the second and subsequent rounds (special game) will not be executed. Therefore, by displaying the round image 564 on the condition that the V prize is won, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the second and subsequent rounds will continue when there is no V prize.

<Feature 4. Small hit development Production at the start of big hit in big hit>
As mentioned in part, the player regarding the first type of profit that the player can obtain for the special game executed when the V prize is won in the small hit game, and the normal game after the end of the special game. At least one of the second types of profits that can be obtained differs depending on the type of small hit symbol when the symbol fluctuation is stopped. The first profit is, for example, the number of rounds of small hit development big hit, and includes 10 rounds and 4 rounds in the second embodiment. The second benefit is, for example, the number of times of shortening the working hours, and includes 100 times and 9 times in the second embodiment.

When the production determining means 303 wins a V during the small hit game, the large winning opening in the special game executed following the small hit game after the final opening of the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game is completed. By the time of the first opening of 20, a suggestion effect suggesting the type of profit that the player can obtain is displayed according to the type of the small hit symbol that triggered the small hit game. The suggestion effect is at least one of the number of times the special electric accessory 556 is operated in the small hit development big hit, the number of times the accessory continuous operation device is operated in the special game, and the number of times of shortening the time after the end of the special game (for example, 100 times, 9 times, etc.) The content may suggest one or any combination. For example, the suggestion effect may include the content of displaying the bonus names "○○ bonus", "XX bonus", and "△△ chance" corresponding to the combination of the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit and the number of times of shortening the time.

Further, the suggestion effect may include a button effect. For example, the suggestion effect may display a content that prompts the player to operate the effect button 109 or the cross key 110. The effect determining means 303 suggests the type of profit that the player can obtain when a predetermined button operation (for example, pressing a button more than a predetermined number of times) is input while displaying the suggestion effect, for example, the above bonus. The name may be displayed on the suggestion effect screen.

FIG. 39 shows the display timing of the suggestion effect. The effect determining means 303 is a closing period (3.5 seconds) after the final opening of the big winning opening 20 in the small hit game + a start demonstration time of the continuous character operation device (a demo time for starting the continuous operation) (10. In 14 seconds of 5 seconds), in other words, the suggestion effect is displayed between the first round and the second round of the small hit development big hit. Note that FIG. 39 shows a situation in which the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game is opened 15 times, but when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 reaches 10 during the small hit game, at that time. The small hit game is completed, and a closing period of 3.5 seconds is provided after the opening is completed no matter how many times the opening is completed. Further, the expectation degree effect described in feature 2 is executed before the suggestion effect.

According to Feature 4, the interest of the game can be enhanced by suggesting the types of profits that the player can obtain in connection with the small hit development big hit. Further, by displaying the suggestion effect on condition that the V prize is won in the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the effect content and the actual profit from becoming inconsistent when the V prize does not occur in the small hit game.

A modified example related to the feature 4 will be described. When there is no V prize in the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 is the closing time (3.5 seconds) after the final opening of the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game + the end demonstration of the small hit game (for example, 0. The failure effect may be displayed within 1 second). The failure effect may be content that suggests or notifies that the jackpot will not develop, or may be content that suggests or notifies that the expected profit acquisition has failed. In FIG. 39 of the second embodiment, when the V prize is won, the end demo time of the small hit game is not set, but this is the end demo time (which was set in advance when the V prize is won. This is because the cancellation (0.1 seconds when V is not won) is canceled (not executed as "0 seconds" or practically not executed as "0.004 seconds (1 interrupt)"). is there.

Another modification related to the feature 4 will be described. The production determining means 303 has a special content that suggests that the occurrence of the next small hit development big hit (in other words, the small hit development big hit consecutive villa) is substantially determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect may be displayed as a suggestion effect. The special effect may include, for example, the display of a "VV bonus" indicating that the bonus is continuously generated. The predetermined condition may be that the occurrence of the next small hit development big hit is substantially confirmed. Specifically, as explained in (1) Feature 5, there is information that will be a small hit in the hold due to pre-reading, and (2) This big hit (small hit symbol) will be given 100 times of time saving continuation. It may be something that is done.

Yet another modification related to feature 4 will be described. The effect determining means 303 is a period in which the suggestion effect can be executed, that is, the large winning opening 20 in the special game executed following the small hit game after the final opening of the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game is completed. In addition to the suggestion effect, one or both of the music selection effect and the character selection effect may be displayed before the first opening (displayed at the same time as the execution of the suggestion effect or after the end of the suggestion effect). The music selection effect may be an effect in which a music to be output from the speaker during one or both of the special game and the normal game after the special game can be selected from a plurality of candidates. The character selection effect is an effect in which a character (that is, an effect mode, which is an embodiment of the effect) to appear in the effect during one or both of the special game and the normal game after the special game can be selected from a plurality of candidates. It may be.

Small hit development In the big hit, the small hit game is the first round, and the number of rounds in which the big hit effect (special game effect) can be executed is one round less. Therefore, by making the music or character selectable between the first and second rounds, it is possible to provide the player with an effect using the music and the character selected by the player for a longer period of time.

Yet another modification related to feature 4 will be described. In the above embodiment, the suggestion effect is displayed during the final closing period (3.5 seconds) of the large winning opening 20 in the small hit game + the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the continuous accessory operating device. .. As a modification, the suggestion effect may be displayed during the start demonstration time (10.5 seconds) of the accessory continuous operation device. In addition, when the small hit end demo (for example, 0.004 seconds) is executed at the end of the small hit game in which the V prize occurs, the final closing period (3.5 seconds) of the large winning opening in the small hit game + small The suggestion effect may be displayed during the period of the hit end demo time (0.004 seconds) + the start demo time of the accessory continuous operation device (10.5 seconds).

Yet another modification related to feature 4 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 500 may further include vibration detecting means for preventing fraud. The vibration detecting means may detect the presence or absence of vibration when the large winning opening 20 is opened in the small hit game, and if the vibration is detected, execute a predetermined fraud notification process (warning display, notification to an external device, etc.). .. Generally, in a unit game or a small hit game of a special game in which a large winning opening having a specific area is opened and closed, vibration detection is enabled during the opening period and the residual ball detection period after the opening period ends. According to the configuration of feature 4, the timing of vibration detection is removed and the suggestion effect is performed (assuming that 5 seconds is the effective period of vibration detection from the transition to the 3.5 second closing period of the grand prize opening, the suggestion effect is performed. Since the button validity period is generated 6 seconds after the start), it is possible to perform a suggestion effect of generating vibration, such as an effect of causing the player to press the button. In addition, in the button validity period, before the image display indicating that the validity period is displayed (image display imitating the effect button 109), a display suggesting that the validity period is reached (button image is faded in, etc.) The button display introduction effect) may be performed, but when the button display introduction effect is started, the effect button 109 may be operated by the player before the valid period, so the button display introduction effect It is preferable to shift the start of the above after the effective period of vibration detection has expired.

<Feature 5. Small hit look-ahead>
As described in the prerequisite technique and the first embodiment, the pre-determination means 235 of the main board 200 receives a lottery value (for example, when a ball enters the second starting port 12 as a trigger). Regardless of whether or not the symbol change based on the winning / failing lottery value) is started immediately, the result when the winning / failing judgment (final judgment) based on the lottery value acquired with the entry of the ball is executed is a big hit or a small hit. Determine in advance whether or not it will be a hit. When the pre-determination result of the entry is a big hit or a small hit, the pre-determination means 235 transmits the advance determination information indicating that the variation corresponding to the entry is a big hit or a small hit to the effect determining means 303. .. The pre-determination information transmitted to the effect determining means 303 is transmitted in such a manner that it can be identified whether a big hit or a small hit is executed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 8, the small hit can be identified by transmitting the information indicating the hit / fail range “4” as the preliminary judgment information.

In the production determination means 303, a V prize is generated during the small hit game, and one or more lottery values for which the pre-determination information received from the main board 200 regarding the reservation for the special figure 2 is held is held. If so, the effect of notifying in advance the occurrence of a small hit in the normal game after the end of the special game between the V prize and the end of the special game and the start of the normal game (hereinafter, "small hit notice"). (Also called "directing") can be executed more than once. In other words, the effect determining means 303 determines that at least one small hit is executed when the right to shift to the big hit is acquired during the small hit game and there is a hold in which the winning / failing lottery is a small hit. The small hit notice effect of the content to be suggested or notified can be executed in the period from the end of the big hit to the start of the time saving state. The hold that is the target of pre-reading for small hits is the special figure 2 hold that is the main game during the time saving. In the embodiment, the effect determining means 303 displays as many V stock images as the number of small hits to be announced, as a small hit advance notice effect, which makes it appear that "V" is stocked in appearance.

The effect determining means 303 can execute the small hit advance notice effect at a plurality of advance notice timings from the V prize to the transition to the time saving state after the end of the small hit development big hit. The plurality of advance notice timings are configured so that the larger the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit, the larger the number of small hit hold notices. Specifically, the plurality of advance notice timings in the second embodiment are the V prize, the third round of the small hit development jackpot, the ninth round of the small hit development jackpot, and the big hit end demonstration. The number of small hits announced at each of the plurality of advance notice timings is limited to one. That is, in one small hit notice effect, the V stock image is increased by one.

Therefore, only when the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit is the maximum (specifically, 10 rounds), it is possible to execute the small hit notice effect four times, that is, all four holds (special figure 2 hold). When it is a small hit, it can be suggested to the player. In other words, if the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit is 4, the small hit notice effect of the 9th round cannot be executed, so even if all 4 holds are small hits, a maximum of 3 small hit notifications are sent. Stay in. The effect determining means 303 determines by lottery how many times the small hit notice effect is to be executed and at what advance timing the small hit notice effect is to be executed, up to the number of reserved small hit prior determination results.

In the case of information in which the pre-determination information for all four existing holds is a small hit, the effect determining means 303 executes four small hit advance notice effects, but at least one small hit advance notice among them. As a production, a premier production may be displayed. The premier effect is a rare effect that is not displayed except when all four holds are small hits, and may be content that suggests or informs that a very large profit can be obtained.

According to Feature 5, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a high possibility that a large profit can be obtained by suggesting that the small hit development big hit can be continuously obtained in the machine equipped with the small hit development big hit. It can be done, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

A modified example related to the feature 5 will be described. When three small hits are held during the first small hit development big hit (or during the big hit) generated earlier, the effect determining means 303 conceals one small hit and two V stock images. May be displayed. If the fluctuation immediately after the end of the small hit development big hit becomes the second small hit development big hit, the V stock image is updated to be reduced to one (at this time, the hold existing from the first small hit development big hit). There are two small hits inside). Further, when one hold generated during the fluctuation of the second small hit is a small hit (the small hit in the hold changes to three), the effect determining means 303 accompanies the second small hit. Even if the small hit notice effect that increases the V stock image by 2 including the number of small hits in the hold that existed during the first small hit development big hit during the small hit game or the big hit game is displayed. Good. As described above, the definitions of the first small hit development big hit and the second small hit development big hit are the special games performed during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device after the V prize is won during the small hit game. However, since the execution timing of this small hit look-ahead effect includes "at the time of V winning" as described above in this embodiment, there is also a case where small hit look-ahead (V stock notification) is performed during the small hit game. , In this paragraph, it is expressed as a small hit look-ahead executed in the "first small hit development big hit" and the "second small hit development big hit".

As a method 1 for realizing this, the effect determining means 303 uses the pre-determination information at the time of a small hit or a big hit (for example, when the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is stopped or when the V prize is won in the small hit game). The number of small hits in the hold may be specified based on the above. The effect determining means 303 calculates the difference between the number of V stocks being displayed and the number of small hits in hold, and selects one of the reportable V stock effect patterns by lottery with the difference as the upper limit. You may. For example, a small hit notice effect that increases the number of differences and the V stock image may be displayed.

Further, as method 2, when a small hit or a big hit is made, the effect determining means 303 specifies the number of small hits in the hold based on the prior determination information, and based on the specified number of small hits, the pattern of the small hit notice effect. (For example, the display timing of the small hit notice effect) may be determined. The effect determining means 303 may cancel the display of the small hit advance notice effect according to the number of displayed V stocks at the display timing of the small hit advance notice effect based on the determined pattern, and replaces the display with the normal effect pattern. May be good. For example, when three small hit notice effects (at the time of V winning, the ninth round, at the end demo) are decided, and when two V stocks are displayed from before the small hit, two small hits are displayed. You may cancel the hit notice effect (for example, the 9th round behind, at the end demo).

According to this variant, in order to specify the number of small hits held for each small hit (or small hit development big hit), a special effect (premier effect) when the number of reserved small hits is the maximum (4). Can increase the chances of doing. Since the timing of displaying the fourth V-stock image by the small hit notice effect is different, for example, the effect determining means 303 turns each V-stock image into a rainbow color when four V-stock images are accumulated. It is preferable to change and display a special effect (premier effect) in the normal game immediately after the end of the small hit development big hit.

Another variant related to feature 5 will be described. Even if there is no small hit in the hold, the effect determining means 303 is in the hold by lottery (with a predetermined probability) when the number of time reduction continuations after the end of the current small hit development big hit is a predetermined value or a predetermined value or more. A small hit notice effect similar to the case where there is a small hit may be displayed. In this modification, when the number of times of shortening the time is 100 times, the small hit notice effect (that is, the V stock image) can be displayed. This is because the small hit probability of the special figure 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 500 is 1/10, and the small hit is almost certainly generated during 100 fluctuations in the time saving state. The number of times that the small hit notice effect is displayed is not limited to 100, and may be a value equal to or greater than the number of times that small hits are almost certainly expected to occur according to the small hit probability. In addition, the V stock image displayed in the small hit notice effect of this modified example must be deleted, which suggests that it is a chance of V winning even in the case of a big hit that does not require the subsequent V winning. Since there is a risk of misunderstanding about the subsequent game (the reliability of the display is lowered due to the possibility of a situation where a small hit is not made even once even though there is a V stock display), a small modification example is used for convenience. The hit notice production is called the second small hit notice production.

According to the second small hit notice effect of this modified example, the V stock image remains even if four holds are exhausted after the small hit development big hit, so that the small hit (or big hit) is extremely likely to be executed. Can be continuously executed, so a surprising effect can be realized. For example, the effect determining means 303 displays the image of "HOLD" on the V stock image at the time of the fourth hold (off) digestion after the small hit development big hit, and "HOLD" until the big hit or the fluctuation of the small hit. The display of the V-stock image may be maintained. The effect determining means 303 may end the display of the "HOLD" V-stock image at any of the start, during, and end of the symbol change of the big hit or the small hit.

In this embodiment, the V-stock display is subtracted and displayed when notifying that the execution of the small hit game is deterministic in the execution of the small hit fluctuation (when 0, the display is deleted). About the V stock display for 100 times of time reduction in the modified example The reason for erasing the V stock image that is "HOLD" even in the big hit is that the time reduction continuation number is reset when the big hit occurs, and when the time reduction continuation number is short, the small hit during that time reduction This is because there is no compensation for the occurrence of. For the same reason, if there is no small hit in the hold and there is a big hit, the second small hit notice effect is displayed even if the number of time reduction continuations after the end of this small hit development big hit is equal to or more than the above predetermined value. I won't let you. Alternatively, even if the lottery for the small hit notice effect is won, the execution of the effect is cancelled.

Yet another modification of feature 5 will be described. The effect determining means 303 has a small hit and a big hit in the hold, and even if the big hit fluctuates before at least one small hit, the small hit notice effect of notifying the number of small hits in the hold by the V stock image. Is displayed. The effect determining means 303 indicates the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image (the number of V stock images indicates the number of small hits) as the V stock digestion effect between the start of the small hit fluctuation and the start of the small hit game. In that case, the V stock image itself) is reduced by one.

On the other hand, the effect determining means 303 does not change the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image when the big hit fluctuates, and maintains the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image over the large hit period. In addition, if there is a small hit in the hold newly generated during the big hit fluctuation or during the big hit game, the effect determining means 303 displays a small hit notice effect that increases the number of small hits indicated by the V stock image during the big hit game. You may let me.

The effect pattern of the V-stock digestion effect executed in the small hit variation in the normal game in the time-saving state may include an effect pattern of a special aspect such that the V-stock image emits rainbow colors and is erased (normal pattern). Is an example of something that emits white light and is erased). When the small hit symbol of this time brings high profit (for example, 10 rounds of small hit development big hit or time saving continuation number of 100 times), the effect determining means 303 is produced in a special mode as an effect pattern of V stock digestion effect. A pattern may be selected to display a special aspect of the V-stock digestion effect. This makes it possible to effectively foretell the player that a high profit will be brought about. In the present embodiment, the result of preliminarily determining the hold of the special figure 2 to be digested in the normal game during the time-saving game, which is referred to when the effect determining means 303 determines the execution of the small hit notice effect, is a special symbol. It does not include information on the stop display mode (small hit symbol), and uses the preliminary judgment information related to the random number used for the hit / fail judgment to judge in advance only whether or not the hold is a small hit. Therefore, at the stage of being displayed as a V stock image, the type of small hit development big hit that occurs at each V winning opportunity is not determined, so the number of V winning opportunities is simply displayed. However, as in this modification, the V stock is switched to the digestion effect based on the stop symbol information of the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the effect determination means 303 when the fluctuation is actually started. It will be possible to diversify the production using images and improve the interest.

Yet another modification of feature 5 will be described. As described in the first embodiment, the specific game control means 270 ends the time reduction when a small hit occurs. Therefore, if the small hit game does not win a V prize (so to speak, if a flat tire is punctured), after the small hit game is completed, the normal game is not a time-saving game but a normal game. The effect determining means 303 did not win a V in the small hit game, but if a V stock image indicating that at least one small hit is held at the end of the small hit game is displayed, after the small hit game is completed. , You may display an effect that makes it appear that the time reduction is continuing. In other words, the effect determining means 303 may display an effect (or an effect having similar contents) in the time saving state as an effect in the normal game in the normal state after the end of the small hit game.

According to this configuration, it is possible to connect to the next small hit while maintaining the player's expectation for the consecutive villa. In this modified example, the effect determining means 303 is an exceptional effect in which a symbol variation pattern that can be selected by the main CPU in the normal state and an effect pattern (variation effect pattern, notice effect pattern) during the time reduction are associated with each other. The pattern table is stored, and the effect pattern is determined by referring to the exceptional effect pattern table.

The present invention has been described above based on the second embodiment. The second embodiment is an example, and it is understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications are possible for the combination of each component and each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention.

The first modification will be described. In the first modification, mainly, the configuration for continuing the firing even after the V winning is shown for the feature 3 and the feature 4 of the second embodiment. During the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 displays a mission effect such as "Enter the attacker (large winning opening 20) and save the gauge!" Instead of the count effect by the object of the treasure box. May be good. As an example of this effect, an empty indicator display (or an indicator having a different initial amount depending on the degree of chance) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60 as the small hit game occurs, and the large hit game is performed. An example is an example in which an effect of expanding the area of the expectation suggestion display in the indicator display (effect of accumulating gauges) is executed when the ball enters the winning opening 20.

Further, the effect determining means 303 displays an image showing the expectation of the result of the suggestion effect between the first and second rounds of the small hit development big hit in this mission effect, similarly to the display of the expectation image of the feature 2. Depending on the degree of achievement of the mission (how much the gauge is accumulated in the above example), the mode of the image showing the degree of expectation of the profit obtained by the small hit development big hit may be changed. It should be noted that the display of the indicator is not limited to the increase mode, but may be a decrease mode, or is continuously changed like an indicator as an effect of promoting the continuation of firing by connecting to the expectation degree suggestion. Instead, it shows whether or not the item will be displayed when the treasure box is opened according to the ball entry, such as "A chance to get item XX, and a big chance if you can get all three items". Therefore, the degree of expectation may be suggested by the number or combination of the finally displayed suggestion objects.

Further, the effect determining means 303 is held every time a game ball having a predetermined unit amount (1 ball or 2 balls, etc.) enters the large winning opening 20, or every time the gauge in the mission effect increases by the unit amount. It may be decided by lottery whether or not to display the effect of suggesting or notifying the number of small hits (small hit notice effect of feature 5). When this lottery is won, the effect determining means 303 may display a small hit notice effect that suggests or notifies the small hit if there is an unnotified small hit in the hold.

Further, when there is a small hit in the hold, the effect determining means 303 has a predetermined probability (for example, 2%) in the vicinity of the large winning opening 20 according to the ball entering the large winning opening 20 after the V winning. The light guide plate installed in may be turned on. When the light guide plate is turned on, the effect determining means 303 has a special effect (described above) that suggests that the small hit development jackpot consecutive villa has been confirmed as a suggestion effect between the first and second rounds of the small hit development jackpot. VV bonus) may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 100%).

A second modification will be described. The second modification also mainly shows the configuration for continuing the firing of the feature 3 and the feature 4 of the second embodiment even after the V prize is won. At the start of the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 includes a large prize opening image and a character image showing the large winning opening 20, and is a production (referred to as a “launch promotion production”) of a content that encourages firing toward the large winning opening 20. .) May be displayed. When a V prize is won in the small hit game, the effect determining means 303 displays the V notification image as shown in FIG. 38, but continues to display the launch promotion effect for a while after the V notification image is displayed. May be good. That is, the V notification image and the firing promotion effect may be displayed in parallel.

The timing to end the display of the launch promotion effect is the one when a certain time has passed after the V prize and the earlier when the closing condition of the big prize opening in the small hit game is satisfied (10 balls are entered or 15 times are opened). It may be. Alternatively, the timing to end the display of the launch promotion effect is when there is a V prize and 3 or more balls are entered in the large winning opening 20, or when 3 or more balls are entered in the large winning opening 20 and then the V winning (even after a few seconds). It may be).

In addition, the effect determining means 303 displays the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game (such as the number of balls entered image 566 in FIG. 38) and the image of the launch promotion effect from the V notification image 568. May also have a higher display priority. For example, the effect determining means 303 draws the number of incoming balls notification image 566 and the image of the launch promotion effect on a drawing layer that is relatively higher than the drawing layers of the plurality of layers provided in the effect display device 60. It may be arranged so as not to be hidden by other images. Further, when the display priority of the V notification image 568 is increased, the effect determining means 303 launches the ball entry number notification image 566 or launches at a position different from the V notification image 568 so as not to overlap with the V notification image 568. An image of the promotion effect may be arranged. Further, the effect determining means 303 may make the size of the ball entry number notification image 566 and the image of the launch promotion effect smaller than the case where the V notification image 568 is not displayed so as not to overlap with the V notification image 568.

Here, an effect example applicable to the second embodiment and the modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. 40A shows a variation effect screen 570 that notifies the occurrence of a small hit (or a big hit), and shows a state in which the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is stopped in a mode indicating a small hit (or a big hit). There is. Further, on the variation effect screen 570 of FIG. 40A, the character image 572 is displayed in a mode of suggesting or notifying a small hit (or a big hit).

FIG. 40 (b) shows a small hit game effect screen 560 following FIG. 40 (a). The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 40B is displayed as, for example, a small hit game start demo. The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 40B includes a right-handed instruction image 562 that instructs the player to hit right, a large winning opening image 574 that imitates the appearance of the large winning opening 20, and a character image 572. .. In the small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 40 (b), the character image 572 is displayed in a mode that encourages right-handed striking (for example, a state in which the right is pointed).

FIG. 40 (c) shows a small hit game effect screen 560 following FIG. 40 (b). The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 40 (c) is displayed, for example, after the V prize is generated in the small hit game. The small hit game effect screen 560 of FIG. 40 (c) prompts the attacker (large winning opening 20) to aim at the V notification image 568 that notifies the V winning, the round image 564 indicating that it is the first round, and the attacker (large winning opening 20). Includes message 576 and gauge image 578 showing the number of balls entered into the grand prize opening 20. The gauge image 578 corresponds to the number of balls entered image 566 of the second embodiment, and the color changes according to, for example, the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20.

FIG. 41 (a) shows a small hit game effect screen 560 following FIG. 40 (c). In the small hit game production screen 560 of FIG. 41 (a), since the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 during the small hit game is a predetermined number or more (for example, 7 balls or more), the image is launched aiming at the large winning opening 20. The message 576 and the big winning opening image 574 to encourage the user to do so are hidden.

FIG. 41 (b) shows an inter-round effect screen 580 following FIG. 41 (a). The inter-round effect screen 580 displays the inter-round effect displayed from the end of the small hit game (first round) to the start of the first unit game (second round) of the special game. The inter-round effect corresponds to the suggestive effect of feature 4 of the second embodiment. The inter-round effect screen 580 includes a button image 584 that prompts the operation of the effect button 109 and the like, and a bonus suggestion image 582 that suggests the type of the current jackpot from among a plurality of types of jackpots that differ in the number of rounds and the number of times the time is shortened. The bonus suggestion image 582 may include an image imitating a roulette wheel that rotates in response to an operation of the effect button 109 or the like. Further, the inter-round effect screen 580 includes an effect image 586 at the edge of the screen. The color of the effect image 586 may change with the passage of time, and at the end of the inter-round effect, the effect image 586 may change to the same color as the gauge image 578 on the small hit game effect screen 560.

FIG. 41 (c) shows a jackpot effect screen 588 following FIG. 41 (b). The jackpot effect screen 588 of FIG. 41 (c) shows the effect of the first unit game (second round) of the special game. As described in part, the jackpot effect screen 588 includes a round image 564, a winning prize ball information 590, and a V stock image 592. The V-stock image 592 of FIG. 41 (c) shows that two small hits are stocked (that is, there are two small hits in the hold).

A third modification will be described. The conditions for ending the time reduction in the pachinko gaming machine 500 are (1) the number of fluctuations A (for example, 7 times) in the special figure 1 and (2) the number of fluctuations B (for example, 100 times, 9 times or 1 time) in the special figure 2. 3) The number of fluctuations C of the special figures 1 and 2 (for example, 100 times, 15 times or 7 times (A + B-1)) is included. As described above in the first embodiment, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 switch the variation pattern table according to the variation of each of the special figures 1 and 2.

Process related to time saving end 1:
The first variation pattern determining means 231 of this modification switches the variation pattern table to the mode 0 table at the timing of the end of the time reduction. The number of fluctuation pattern candidates (the number of selectable candidates) defined in the fluctuation pattern table for time saving in Special Figure 1 is small. Therefore, by forcibly switching the fluctuation pattern table to the mode 0 table at the end of the time reduction, the effect determined according to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 hold becomes monotonous during the multiple fluctuations after the end of the time reduction. It can be avoided.

Process related to time saving end 2:
On the other hand, in the second variation pattern determining means 232 of the present modification, even if the time reduction ends, the four variations after the time reduction ends refer to a variation pattern table (mode 7 table in FIG. 29) different from the usual one. The fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 is determined. In the pachinko gaming machine 500, since the time saving effect mode (rush effect of FIG. 26) continues while the hold of special figure 2 is exhausted after the time saving ends, the time saving ends exceptionally under the time saving end condition of special figure 1. However, when the special figure 2 hold occurs, it is necessary to select the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the time saving effect mode.

Process related to time saving end 3:
In the case of no V winning (puncture) in the small hit game, which is an exceptional time saving end, the first variation pattern determining means 231 switches the variation pattern table of the special figure 1 to the mode 0 table of the special figure 1. Further, the second variation pattern determining means 232 also switches the variation pattern table of the special figure 2 to the mode 0 table of the special figure 2.

In the above process 3, there is a possibility that a small hit does not occur in the special figure 1 as in the first embodiment, or a small hit may occur in the special figure 1, and the small hit game of the special figure 1 It is executed when a V prize can be won in the same manner as in Special Figure 2. On the other hand, there is a possibility that a small hit may occur in the special figure 1, but when the opening / closing control of the specific area opening / closing device 552 is performed so as not to win a V in the small hit game of the special figure 1 (small hit in the special figure 1). (When the game is designed to puncture almost certainly), the small hit game of FIG. 1 does not control the above process 3 and the time saving end. That is, in the small hit game of Special Figure 1, the time reduction is continued even if the V prize is not won. In order to prevent the time reduction from ending due to a puncture in the small hit game when a small hit occurs due to the fluctuation of special figure 1 before the special figure 2 hold occurs at the time of the first hit (at the time of the transition to the first time reduction). Is.

A fourth modification will be described. In the fourth modification, a modification relating to the round indicator lamp will be described. As described in the prerequisite technology, the game status display unit 76 functions as a round indicator lamp that displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game by the 7-segment LED. The main board 200 (for example, the main display control means 250) has both a 10-round symbol jackpot and a 10-round small hit development jackpot (small hit 1R, jackpot 9R), and a game status display unit 76 (that is, a round indicator). May emit light in the same pattern. Similarly, the main board 200 (for example, the main display control means 250) has the same pattern of the game state display unit 76 in both the 4-round symbol big hit and the 4-round small hit development big hit (small hit 1R, big hit 3R). You may make it emit light with.

In the main board 200, in the 10-round small hit development big hit and the 4-round small hit development big hit, the start of the special gaming state based on the operation of the V prize and the accessory continuous operation device after the V prize (small hit development). Until the start of the big hit), the game state display unit 76 may be made to emit light in a common pattern for the small hit game. Then, after winning the V prize, the game state display unit 76 may emit light in the same pattern as the 10-round symbol jackpot and in the same pattern as the 4-round symbol jackpot, respectively. This makes it impossible or difficult to distinguish between 10 rounds and 4 rounds before winning a V.

A fifth modification will be described. In the fifth modification, a modification relating to the performance display unit 159 will be described. As described in the prerequisite technology, the performance display unit 159 "calculates and displays the ratio (referred to as the base value) of the total number of winning balls to the total number of launched balls, which is the total of safe balls and out balls". In this modification, the base value is displayed especially during the normal game in the normal state (low probability game state and non-time saving game state), and during the normal game during the time saving game and when the accessory continuous operation device is operated. During the special game, it is not treated as counting data for displaying the performance display unit.

In the game machines described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the time-saving game is ended when the small hit game corresponding to the substantially first round of the small hit development big hit is started, and the small hit game is ended. Along with this, it is configured to operate the accessory continuous actuating device. Therefore, during the small hit game, it means that the state is the same as that of the normal game (low probability game state and non-time saving game state) in the normal state, and the state corresponding to the substantially first round in the small hit development big hit. In spite of this, the acquired game ball will be counted as the base value during normal game in the normal state. Under such circumstances, when the base value of the fifth modification is calculated, a safe ball equivalent to a ball output of 1R of the big hit is generated every time a small hit development big hit that becomes a small hit V occurs (second embodiment). 120 balls) is added to the base value, so in the small hit game that should be treated as a special game in the game, even the value that should not be counted originally is included in the count data of the performance display unit 159. There is a risk that this will happen.

Therefore, as a fifth modification, the optimum method as the data counting method of the performance display unit 159 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment in which the small hit development big hit is adopted will be described below.

Regarding the data displayed on the performance display unit 159 of the fifth modification example, since the main CPU 290 is executing the small hit game which is the small hit development big hit, the execution of the big hit game becomes definite when the V prize is won. After the V prize is considered to be equivalent to a big hit, the total number of prize balls generated by entering the big prize opening 20 after the V prize, and the safe balls and out balls fired after the V prize are calculated as the base value. Adopt a method of controlling to be outside. As a method for satisfying the gaming state equivalent to the big hit after the V prize, the flag related to the operation of the condition device or the accessory continuous operation device is set to the same as during the big hit based on the V prize during the small hit game. You can switch to a value.

By doing so, for example, during the small hit game of the second embodiment, when the game ball that has entered the third ball passes through the specific area (V wins), the game ball of the fourth ball is released. Small hit development It can be regarded as a prize ball generated in a big hit, and only "36 balls" (12 prize balls x 3 incoming balls) are added as counting targets as the number of prize balls generated during normal games in the normal state. In a game machine that adopts the small hit development big hit, the base during the normal game in the normal state is excessively raised based on the occurrence of the small hit game corresponding to the actual first round. Can be prevented.

A sixth modification will be described. In each embodiment, the number of rounds of the small hit development big hit and the number of times of shortening the time after the end of the small hit development big hit were determined according to the small hit symbol. As a modification, at least one of the number of rounds and the number of times of shortening of time may be determined according to the result of a lottery (a small hit symbol may be involved) at the time of winning a V, instead of the small hit symbol.

The "random number" referred to in the present specification or the scope of patent claims does not have to be a physical random number generated by a random number generation circuit or a true random number in a mathematical sense, and a hardware random number or random number generation using a 16-bit counter. It may be a pseudo-random number such as a software random number using an algorithm. Alternatively, a combination of a hardware random number and a software random number, for example, a plus random number method in which the initial value is changed each time the counter makes one round may be used.

Strictly speaking, when the term "table" or "criteria (selection criteria)" is used in the present specification or claims, the correspondence between the first parameter such as a lottery value and the second parameter such as a value indicating an option. Not only refers to the data defined in the table structure, but also broadly includes the case where such a correspondence is realized by a program structure in which the second parameter is derived from the first parameter. Including them, the concept is substantially synonymous with "table" and is appropriately referred to as "criteria (selection criteria)". In addition, when a table structure is used, the selection criteria that are substantially one type may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables, but the term "multiple types of selection criteria" is subdivided. Shows the actual number of table types, not the number of tableized tables.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine in which a game ball (prize ball) is paid out as a profit based on the entry of a ball is illustrated, but instead of paying out the prize ball, an electronic profit management system is used to launch the game ball. -It can also be applied to so-called enclosed type pachinko machines that manage prize ball grants. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, typically, a predetermined number of game balls circulate in the game machine and play a game with the circulating game balls, and the game balls can be launched instead of paying out the prize balls. Benefit the player by increasing the number of times. For example, a ball circulation means that receives a game ball that has rolled in the game area and sends it to the game area again without discharging it to the outside of the game machine to circulate it in the game machine, and the number of launched balls and the number of received balls of the game ball. , And a ball number management means for managing the number of balls held based on the number of prize balls paid out, and a ball holding display means for displaying the managed number of balls held.

Any combination of the examples and modifications described above is also useful as an embodiment of the present invention. The new embodiments resulting from the combination have the effects of the combined examples and the modifications. It is also understood by those skilled in the art that the functions to be fulfilled by each of the constituent elements described in the claims are realized by a single component or a cooperation thereof shown in the examples and modifications.

The techniques described in the first embodiment and the modifications described above can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 1-1-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A special symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening is provided.
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to operate the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the ball enters the operation port.
A normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a normal symbol for showing the result of the operation lottery, and
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a hit, the operation control means for opening the ball entry fluctuation mechanism and the operation control means.
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port is obtained by increasing the winning probability of the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Has a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game. ,
With
When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, the operation control means is set a predetermined time before the time interval in which a plurality of game balls are launched. A ball game machine that opens the entry ball fluctuation mechanism.

[Aspect 1-1-2]
The easy ball entry state ends with the end of one symbol change triggered by the ball entering the second starting port.
In the one-time symbol fluctuation time triggered by the ball entering the second starting port in the easy-to-enter state, the normal symbol hits at least twice or more when the operation lottery is continuously executed. The ball game machine according to aspect 1-1, which is defined in a time that is more than possible.

[Aspect 1-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A special symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening is provided.
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to operate the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the ball enters the operation port.
A normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a normal symbol for showing the result of the operation lottery, and
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a hit, the operation control means for opening the ball entry fluctuation mechanism and the operation control means.
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port is obtained by increasing the winning probability of the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Has a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game. ,
With
When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, the operation control means is set a predetermined time before the time interval in which a plurality of game balls are launched. Open the entry ball fluctuation mechanism,
The operation control means is determined when the opening time of the ball entry fluctuation mechanism reaches the predetermined time, or the number of balls entering the second starting port is equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second lottery value. A ball game machine that ends the opening of the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the number is reached.

[Aspect 1-3]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A special symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening is provided.
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to operate the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the ball enters the operation port.
A normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a normal symbol for showing the result of the operation lottery, and
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a hit, the operation control means for opening the ball entry fluctuation mechanism and the operation control means.
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port is obtained by increasing the winning probability of the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Has a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game. ,
An effect control means for displaying an effect content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, the operation control means is set a predetermined time before the time interval in which a plurality of game balls are launched. Open the entry ball fluctuation mechanism,
When the ball entry fluctuation mechanism is opened due to the predetermined hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state, the effect control means prompts the launch of the game ball aiming at the second starting port. The special effect is displayed, and while the special effect is being displayed, the variation effect of the decorative symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the first starting port is reduced and displayed.
In the normal game in the easy-to-enter state, the variation time of the special symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination based on the entry into the first starting port is fixed to a time shorter than the average variation time in the normal game in the normal state. ,
The effect control means displays the special effect in the normal game in the easy-to-enter state, and changes in the decorative symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination based on the entry into the first starting port during the display of the special effect. A ball game machine that hides the production.

[Aspect 1-4]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A special symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening is provided.
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to operate the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the ball enters the operation port.
A normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a normal symbol for showing the result of the operation lottery, and
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a hit, the operation control means for opening the ball entry fluctuation mechanism and the operation control means.
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port is obtained by increasing the winning probability of the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Has a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game. ,
An effect control means for displaying an effect content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
The easy ball entry state ends when a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations triggered by the ball entering the second starting port are completed.
The effect control means is a ball game machine that displays a special effect of prompting the launch of a game ball aimed at the second starting port during the final symbol change in the easy-to-enter state.

[Aspect 1-5-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A special symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening is provided.
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to operate the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the ball enters the operation port.
A normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a normal symbol for showing the result of the operation lottery, and
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a hit, the operation control means for opening the ball entry fluctuation mechanism and the operation control means.
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port is obtained by increasing the winning probability of the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Has a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game. ,
An effect control means for displaying an effect content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, the operation control means is set a predetermined time before the time interval in which a plurality of game balls are launched. Open the entry ball fluctuation mechanism,
When the ball entry fluctuation mechanism is opened due to the predetermined hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state, the effect control means prompts the launch of the game ball aiming at the second starting port. Display a special effect,
In the effect control means, the variation of the special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port or the variation of the special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port is the predetermined standby demo transition time. If not, display a predetermined standby demo on the effect display device.
The hold control means displays a variable display of the normal symbol indicating the result of the operation lottery, up to a predetermined number, of the general drawing lottery value for the operation lottery acquired when the ball enters the operation port. Hold until the start,
The standby demo transition time is set longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the general drawing lottery value is held up to the upper limit.

[Aspect 1-5-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A special symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening is provided.
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to operate the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the ball enters the operation port.
A normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a normal symbol for showing the result of the operation lottery, and
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a hit, the operation control means for opening the ball entry fluctuation mechanism and the operation control means.
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port is obtained by increasing the winning probability of the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Has a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game. ,
An effect control means for displaying an effect content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a predetermined hit in the normal game in the normal state, the operation control means is set a predetermined time before the time interval in which a plurality of game balls are launched. Open the entry ball fluctuation mechanism,
When the ball entry fluctuation mechanism is opened due to the predetermined hit of the normal symbol in the normal game in the normal state, the effect control means prompts the launch of the game ball aiming at the second starting port. Display a special effect,
In the effect control means, the entry of the game ball into either of the plurality of winning openings or the entry openings provided in the gaming area has not been detected in the predetermined standby demo transition time, and the special symbol has If it is not fluctuating, the effect display device is displayed with a predetermined standby demo.
The hold control means displays a variable display of the normal symbol indicating the result of the operation lottery, up to a predetermined number, of the general drawing lottery value for the operation lottery acquired when the ball enters the operation port. Hold until the start,
The standby demo transition time is set longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the general drawing lottery value is held up to the upper limit.

[Aspect 1-6]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be opened so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A special symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a special symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, the player is in a more advantageous state than the normal game, and the special game control means for executing the special game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening is provided.
An operating port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
An operation lottery means for executing an operation lottery for determining whether or not to operate the ball entry fluctuation mechanism when the ball enters the operation port.
A normal symbol display control means for varyingly displaying a normal symbol for showing the result of the operation lottery, and
When the result of the operation lottery is a hit and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a hit, the operation control means for opening the ball entry fluctuation mechanism and the operation control means.
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game, the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port is obtained by increasing the winning probability of the normal state and at least the operation lottery from the normal state. Has a ball entry easy state higher than the normal state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game to the ball entry easy state after the end of the special game. ,
An effect control means for displaying an effect content on a predetermined effect display device,
With
The easy ball entry state ends when a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations triggered by the ball entering the second starting port are completed.
The effect control means ends as a result of a change that triggers the end of the easy ball entry state, or a change based on the second lottery value that remains in the hold control means after the end of the easy ball entry state. In this case, the effect related to the ball output up to that point is displayed on the effect display device.
The effect control means is a bullet that displays an effect related to the ball ejection in a manner higher in visibility than the variable effect when the special symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail determination based on the entry into the first starting port is changing. Ball game machine.

The techniques described in the second embodiment and modifications described above can be expressed as follows.
[Aspect 2-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device that displays fluctuations in the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment, and
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by opening the grand prize opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and
An opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the winning opening,
With
The big winning opening includes an opening / closing member for switching between an open state and a closed state of the big winning opening, and when the big winning opening is in the closed state, the game ball rolls on the opening / closing member.
Both the unit game and the small hit game in the special game are terminated when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number.
The opening time of the large winning opening in the small hit game is set to a short time during which the game ball rolling on the opening / closing member can enter the large winning opening.
The opening / closing control means is a ball game machine capable of repeatedly opening the big winning opening for a short time a predetermined number or more times in the small hit game.
According to this configuration, in a machine equipped with a small hit development big hit, by using a common large winning opening for the big hit and the small hit, it is possible to secure a wide board area where the production can be performed, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the production. it can. Further, in the small hit game, it is possible to obtain a prize ball equivalent to one round during the big hit, and it becomes easy for the player to have a sufficient feeling of coming out.

[Aspect 2-2-1]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device that displays fluctuations in the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment, and
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by opening the grand prize opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining an effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses.
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the large winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game.
The effect determining means is a ball game machine that displays images corresponding to the predetermined number during the small hit game and changes the image according to the entry of a ball into the large winning opening during the small hit game.
According to this configuration, it is suggested to the player that it is possible to enter a relatively large number of balls into the big winning opening during the small hit game (in other words, the possibility of getting a ball) in the machine equipped with the small hit development big hit. It is possible to encourage the player to fire during the small hit game.

[Aspect 2-2-2]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device that displays fluctuations in the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment, and
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by opening the grand prize opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining an effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses.
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the large winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game.
When the game ball that has entered the large winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, the effect determining means determines the small hit according to the type of the symbol indicating the small hit after the end of the small hit game. Display one of multiple types of suggestion effects that suggest the profits that the player can obtain.
The effect determining means displays an image showing the degree of expectation that a high profit is suggested in a later suggestion effect during the small hit game, and responds to the ball entering the large winning opening during the small hit game. A ball game machine that changes the image.
According to this configuration, in a machine equipped with a small hit development big hit, it is possible to identify the degree of expectation that a high profit is suggested by a later suggestion effect by entering the ball into the big winning opening during the small hit game. It is possible to promote firing during a small hit game.

[Aspect 2-3]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device that displays fluctuations in the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment, and
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the operation of the special electric accessory and the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games involving the operation of the special electric accessory and the opening of the large winning opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining an effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses.
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the large winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game.
When the game ball that has entered the large winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, the effect determining means displays an effect that notifies that fact, and changes from the small hit game to the special game. An image showing the cumulative number of times the special electric accessory has been activated is displayed over the entire period.
The effect determining means is a ball game machine that displays, as the image, an image indicating that it is the first operation of the special electric accessory during the small hit game.
According to this configuration, an image showing the "first round" or the like is displayed even during the small hit game, that is, a series of count displays are performed from the small hit game to the special game. This suggests that it is possible to obtain the same number of balls as one round of the special game in the small hit game, and it is possible to encourage the player to fire during the small hit game.

[Aspect 2-4]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device that displays fluctuations in the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment, and
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by opening the grand prize opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining an effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses.
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the large winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game.
The types of profits that a player can obtain in a special game executed when a game ball that has entered the large winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, and the normal after the end of the special game. At least one of the types of profits a player can earn with respect to a game depends on the type of symbol indicating the small hit.
When the game ball that has entered the large winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, the effect determining means waits after the final opening of the large winning opening in the small hit game is completed. A ball game machine that displays an effect suggesting the type of profit that a player can obtain according to the type of a symbol indicating a small hit until the first opening of the big winning opening in the special game.
According to this configuration, on condition that the game ball has passed through a specific area, a game ball in a small hit game is displayed by displaying an effect suggesting the type of profit that the player can obtain according to the small hit symbol. It is possible to prevent the production content and the actual profit type from becoming inconsistent when the player does not pass through the specific area. Further, in the small hit game, vibration detection may be performed to prevent fraud, but according to the above configuration, since the timing of vibration detection is removed and a suggestion effect is performed, vibration such as an effect of causing the player to press a button is generated. It is also possible to suggest the mode in which it occurs.

[Aspect 2-5]
A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device that displays fluctuations in the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment, and
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by opening the grand prize opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining an effect displayed on the effect display device, and
When a ball enters the second starting port, it is acquired with the entry as a trigger, regardless of whether or not the variation display of the symbol based on the lottery value acquired with the entry is immediately started. When the result of executing the winning / failing determination based on the lottery value is a small hit, the advance determination information indicating that the change corresponding to the entry is a small hit can be notified to the effect determining means in advance. Judgment means and
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses.
The effect determining means is a case where a game ball that has entered the large winning opening during the small hit game has passed through the specific area, and the lottery value for which the preliminary determination information is a small hit is 1. When indicating that two or more are held, a ball game machine capable of executing an effect of notifying the occurrence of a small hit one or more times between the end of the special game and the start of the normal game.
According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a high possibility that a large profit can be obtained by suggesting that it is possible to additionally acquire the small hit development big hit in the machine equipped with the small hit development big hit. It can be done, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

11 1st start port, 12 2nd start port, 221 1st hit / fail determination means, 222 2nd hit / fail determination means, 240 hold control means, 260 special game control means, 265 small hit game control means, 270 specific game control means, 303 Production determination means, 304 Production control means, 500 Pachinko game machine.

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and
A second starting port provided at a predetermined position in the game area and having a ball entry fluctuation mechanism that can be displaced so that the entry of the game ball changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state.
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting port or the second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting port. When,
A symbol display device that displays fluctuations in the symbol for showing the result of the hit / fail judgment, and
A hold control means that holds the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the winning / failing determination.
A large winning opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, is opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment, and the entry of the game ball is an opportunity to give a profit to the player.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game control means for executing the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the large winning opening, and the small hit game control means.
When the symbol indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit is stopped and displayed, or the game ball that has entered the big winning opening during the small hit game passes through a specific area provided inside the game ball. If this is the case, a special game control means for executing a special game including a plurality of unit games accompanied by opening the grand prize opening, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and
The gaming state relating to the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port in the normal game includes a normal state and an easy-to-enter state in which the ease of entering the second starting port is higher than that of the normal state. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game control means for shifting the game state of the normal game after the end of the special game to an easy-to-enter state, and
A production display device that displays the production, and
An effect determining means for determining an effect displayed on the effect display device, and
With
The small hit game ends when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the small hit game reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time elapses.
The predetermined number is the number of balls entered into the large winning opening, which is a condition for ending the unit game in the special game.
The types of profits that a player can obtain in a special game executed when a game ball that has entered the large winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, and the normal after the end of the special game. At least one of the types of profits a player can earn with respect to a game depends on the type of symbol indicating the small hit.
When the game ball that has entered the large winning opening during the small hit game passes through the specific area, the effect determining means waits after the final opening of the large winning opening in the small hit game is completed. Until the first opening of the big winning opening in the special game, an effect suggesting the type of profit that the player can obtain is displayed according to the type of the symbol indicating the small hit .
In the small hit game, the small hit game is executed depending on whether the result of the winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value is a small hit and the result of the winning / failing determination based on the second lottery value is a small hit. The small hit game, which is executed when the result of the winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value is different, is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area.
In the small hit game executed when the result of the winning / failing determination based on the second lottery value is a small hit during the easy entry state, when the game ball does not enter the specific area, the small hit game The game state after the end is the normal state, but in the small hit game executed when the result of the winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value is a small hit during the easy ball entry state, the specific area is When there is no entry of a game ball, the gaming state after the end of the small hit game is a ball game machine in which the easy entry state can be continued .

Images